Stratasys DUPCAB Assembly of RFID reader and antenna boards User Manual Stratasys P750k User Guide
Stratasys Ltd Assembly of RFID reader and antenna boards Stratasys P750k User Guide
User Manual
| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 2665715 |
| Application ID | P9buBZxp3/+eSBTh6QjO5Q== |
| Document Description | User Manual |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 422.44kB (5280516 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2015-07-03 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2015-07-03 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2017-09-26 06:20:25 |
| Producing Software | GPL Ghostscript 9.18 |
| Document Lastmod | 2017-09-26 06:20:25 |
| Document Title | Stratasys P750k User Guide |
| Document Creator | FrameMaker 7.2 |
| Document Author: | MR |
User Guide English Stratasys P750K 3D Printer System Copyright Copyrightȱ©ȱ2015ȱStratasysȱLtd.ȱAllȱrightsȱreserved.ȱ ThisȱdocumentationȱcontainsȱproprietaryȱinformationȱofȱStratasysȱLtd.ȱThisȱinformationȱisȱsuppliedȱ solelyȱtoȱassistȱauthorizedȱusersȱofȱStratasysȱP750Kȱ3Dȱprintingȱsystems.ȱNoȱpartȱofȱthisȱdocumentȱ mayȱbeȱusedȱforȱotherȱpurposes,ȱandȱitȱmayȱnotȱbeȱdisclosedȱtoȱotherȱparties.ȱ Theȱspecificationsȱonȱwhichȱthisȱdocumentȱisȱbasedȱareȱsubjectȱtoȱchangeȱwithoutȱnotice. Noȱpartȱofȱthisȱbookȱmayȱbeȱreproducedȱinȱanyȱformȱorȱbyȱanyȱmeans,ȱnorȱstoredȱinȱaȱdatabaseȱorȱ retrievalȱsystem,ȱwithoutȱpriorȱpermissionȱinȱwritingȱfromȱStratasysȱLtd. IfȱthisȱdocumentȱisȱdistributedȱasȱaȱPDFȱfile,ȱyouȱmayȱprintȱitȱforȱinternalȱuse. Trademarks TheȱfollowingȱareȱregisteredȱtrademarksȱofȱStratasysȱLtd.:ȱStratasys®,ȱObjet®,ȱFullCure®. TheȱfollowingȱareȱtrademarksȱofȱStratasysȱLtd.:ȱConnex,ȱConnex500,ȱConnex350,ȱObjet260ȱConnex,ȱ PolyJet,ȱObjetȱStudio,ȱJobȱManager. MicrosoftȱandȱMicrosoftȱXPȱareȱtrademarksȱofȱMicrosoftȱCorporation. Allȱnamesȱofȱproductsȱandȱservicesȱcitedȱinȱthisȱbookȱareȱtrademarksȱorȱregisteredȱtrademarksȱofȱtheirȱ respectiveȱcompanies.ȱ FCC Compliance Theȱequipmentȱreferredȱtoȱinȱthisȱguideȱhasȱbeenȱtestedȱandȱfoundȱtoȱcomplyȱwithȱtheȱlimitsȱforȱaȱ ClassȱAȱdeviceȱpursuantȱtoȱpartȱ15ȱofȱtheȱFCCȱrules.ȱTheseȱlimitsȱprovideȱreasonableȱprotectionȱ againstȱharmfulȱinterferenceȱwhenȱtheȱequipmentȱisȱoperatedȱinȱaȱcommercialȱenvironment.ȱStratasysȱ 3Dȱprintingȱsystemsȱgenerate,ȱuseȱandȱcanȱradiateȱradioȬfrequencyȱenergyȱand,ȱifȱnotȱinstalledȱandȱ usedȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱtheȱinstructionȱmanual,ȱmayȱcauseȱharmfulȱinterferenceȱtoȱradioȱ communications.ȱOperationȱofȱthisȱequipmentȱinȱaȱresidentialȱareaȱisȱlikelyȱtoȱcauseȱharmfulȱ interference,ȱinȱwhichȱcaseȱtheȱuserȱwillȱbeȱȱrequiredȱtoȱcorrectȱtheȱinterferenceȱatȱhisȱownȱexpense.ȱ Theȱ3Dȱprinterȱreferredȱtoȱinȱthisȱguideȱcontainsȱaȱtransmitterȱmodule,ȱFCCȱIDȱYH6ȬDUPCAB.ȱ NOTE:ȱStratasysȱisȱnotȱresponsibleȱforȱradioȱorȱTVȱinterferenceȱcausedȱbyȱunauthorizedȱmodificationȱ toȱthisȱequipment.ȱChangesȱorȱmodificationsȱnotȱexpresslyȱapprovedȱbyȱStratasysȱcouldȱvoidȱtheȱuser’sȱ authorityȱtoȱoperateȱtheȱequipment. Equipment Recycling InȱtheȱEuropeanȱUnion,ȱthisȱsymbolȱindicatesȱthatȱwhenȱtheȱlastȱuserȱwishesȱtoȱdiscardȱaȱproduct,ȱitȱ mustȱbeȱsentȱtoȱappropriateȱfacilitiesȱforȱrecoveryȱandȱrecycling.ȱForȱinformationȱaboutȱproperȱ disposal,ȱcheckȱyourȱpurchaseȱcontract,ȱorȱcontactȱtheȱsupplierȱofȱtheȱequipment. ȱȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ ȱ Limitation of Liability Theȱproduct,ȱsoftwareȱorȱservicesȱareȱbeingȱprovidedȱonȱanȱ“asȱis”ȱandȱ“asȱavailable”ȱbasis.ȱExceptȱasȱ mayȱbeȱstatedȱspecificallyȱinȱyourȱcontract,ȱStratasysȱLtd.ȱexpresslyȱdisclaimsȱallȱwarrantiesȱofȱanyȱ kind,ȱwhetherȱexpressȱorȱimplied,ȱincluding,ȱbutȱnotȱlimitedȱto,ȱanyȱimpliedȱwarrantiesȱofȱ merchantability,ȱfitnessȱforȱaȱparticularȱpurposeȱandȱnonȬinfringement. YouȱunderstandȱandȱagreeȱthatȱStratasysȱLtd.ȱshallȱnotȱbeȱliableȱforȱanyȱdirect,ȱindirect,ȱincidental,ȱ special,ȱconsequentialȱorȱexemplaryȱdamages,ȱincludingȱbutȱnotȱlimitedȱto,ȱdamagesȱforȱlossȱofȱprofits,ȱ goodwill,ȱuse,ȱdataȱorȱotherȱintangibleȱlossesȱ(evenȱifȱStratasysȱhasȱbeenȱadvisedȱofȱtheȱpossibilityȱofȱ suchȱdamages),ȱresultingȱfrom:ȱ(i)ȱtheȱuseȱorȱtheȱinabilityȱtoȱuseȱtheȱproductȱorȱsoftware;ȱ(ii)ȱtheȱcostȱofȱ procurementȱofȱsubstituteȱgoodsȱandȱservicesȱresultingȱfromȱanyȱproducts,ȱgoods,ȱdata,ȱsoftware,ȱ informationȱorȱservicesȱpurchased;ȱ(iii)ȱunauthorizedȱaccessȱtoȱorȱalterationȱofȱyourȱproducts,ȱsoftwareȱ orȱdata;ȱ(iv)ȱstatementsȱorȱconductȱofȱanyȱthirdȱparty;ȱ(v)ȱanyȱotherȱmatterȱrelatingȱtoȱtheȱproduct,ȱ software,ȱorȱservices.ȱ Theȱtextȱandȱdrawingsȱhereinȱareȱforȱillustrationȱandȱreferenceȱonly.ȱTheȱspecificationsȱonȱwhichȱtheyȱ areȱbasedȱareȱsubjectȱtoȱchange.ȱStratasysȱLtd.ȱmay,ȱatȱanyȱtimeȱandȱwithoutȱnotice,ȱmakeȱchangesȱtoȱ thisȱdocument.ȱStratasysȱLtd.,ȱforȱitselfȱandȱonȱbehalfȱofȱitsȱsubsidiaries,ȱassumesȱnoȱliabilityȱforȱ technicalȱorȱeditorialȱerrorsȱorȱomissionsȱmadeȱherein,ȱandȱshallȱnotȱbeȱliableȱforȱincidental,ȱ consequential,ȱindirect,ȱorȱspecialȱdamages,ȱincluding,ȱwithoutȱlimitation,ȱlossȱofȱuse,ȱlossȱorȱalterationȱ ofȱdata,ȱdelays,ȱorȱlostȱprofitsȱorȱsavingsȱarisingȱfromȱtheȱuseȱofȱthisȱdocument. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1a) Patents ThisȱproductȱisȱcoveredȱbyȱoneȱorȱmoreȱofȱtheȱfollowingȱU.S.ȱpatents: 5,386,500 6,259,962 6,569,373 6,658,314 6,850,334 7,183,335 7,209,797 7,225,045 7,364,686 7,369,915 7,479,510 7,500,846 7,604,768 7,628,857 7,658,976 7,725,209 StratasysȱLtd.ȱ http://www.stratasys.com DOCȬ08010 RevisionȱAȱ(DRAFTȱ1a) Juneȱ2015 iv Contents AboutȱThisȱGuide UsingȱThisȱGuide ............................................................................................................................... 1–2 ForȱMoreȱInformation........................................................................................................................ 1–2 TermsȱUsedȱinȱThisȱGuide................................................................................................................ 1–3 Safety SafetyȱFeatures ................................................................................................................................... 2–2 SymbolsȱandȱWarningȱLabels .......................................................................................................... 2–3 SafetyȱGuidelines ............................................................................................................................... 2–4 PrinterȱInstallation .............................................................................................................................. 2–4 PrinterȱOperation ................................................................................................................................ 2–4 UVȱRadiation ....................................................................................................................................... 2–4 PrinterȱMaintenance ........................................................................................................................... 2–4 ModelȱandȱSupportȱMaterials ........................................................................................................... 2–5 UVȱLamps ............................................................................................................................................ 2–5 FirstȱAidȱforȱWorkingȱwithȱPrintingȱMaterials.............................................................................. 2–6 ContactȱwithȱSkin................................................................................................................................ 2–6 ContactȱwithȱEyes ............................................................................................................................... 2–6 Ingestion ............................................................................................................................................... 2–6 Inhalation ............................................................................................................................................. 2–6 WasteȱDisposal ................................................................................................................................... 2–7 IntroducingȱtheȱStratasysȱP750Kȱ3D PrintingȱSystem WelcomeȱtoȱConnex........................................................................................................................... 3–2 WorkȱConfigurations......................................................................................................................... 3–2 SourceȱFiles ......................................................................................................................................... 3–3 STLȱFiles ............................................................................................................................................... 3–3 SLCȱFiles............................................................................................................................................... 3–3 ConnexȱWorkflows ............................................................................................................................ 3–4 PrintingȱMaterials .............................................................................................................................. 3–5 Storage .................................................................................................................................................. 3–5 ShelfȱLife............................................................................................................................................... 3–5 ExposureȱtoȱLight................................................................................................................................ 3–5 SafetyȱConsiderations......................................................................................................................... 3–6 Disposal ................................................................................................................................................ 3–6 WorkȱEnvironment ............................................................................................................................ 3–6 WorkstationȱRequirements............................................................................................................... 3–7 PreparingȱFilesȱforȱUseȱwithȱObjetȱ3DȱPrintingȱSystems ............................................................. 3–8 ConvertingȱCADȱFilesȱtoȱSTLȱFormat.............................................................................................. 3–8 ConvertingȱCADȱFilesȱtoȱSLCȱFormat ............................................................................................. 3–8 ObjetȱStudioȱSoftware ....................................................................................................................... 3–9 InstallingȱObjetȱSoftware HowȱtoȱInstallȱSoftwareȱforȱtheȱStratasysȱ3D Printing System ................................................... 4–2 HowȱtoȱUninstallȱObjetȱStudio......................................................................................................... 4–6 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide UsingȱObjetȱStudio LaunchingȱObjetȱStudio .................................................................................................................... 5–3 Windows®ȱ7ȱSecurityȱWarning......................................................................................................... 5–3 ObjetȱStudioȱInterface ......................................................................................................................... 5–4 RibbonȱCommands.............................................................................................................................. 5–6 ObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱMenu......................................................................................................... 5–8 ModelȱTreeȱPane .................................................................................................................................. 5–8 PreparingȱModelsȱforȱProduction.................................................................................................... 5–9 OBJDFȱFiles:ȱOverview ....................................................................................................................... 5–9 Model Files ...........................................................................................................................................5–9 PlacingȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱBuildȱTray ................................................................................................... 5–10 OpeningȱObjetȱTrayȱFiles.................................................................................................................. 5–14 QuickȬAccessȱModelȱCommands .................................................................................................... 5–16 CopyingȱandȱPastingȱObjects........................................................................................................... 5–17 SelectingȱObjects ................................................................................................................................ 5–18 SplittingȱObjectsȱintoȱComponents ................................................................................................. 5–19 ModelȬMaterialȱSettings ...................................................................................................................5–20 ChangingȱtheȱModelȱMaterial.......................................................................................................... 5–21 AssigningȱaȱModelȱMaterialȱtoȱObjects .......................................................................................... 5–22 SurfaceȱFinish ..................................................................................................................................... 5–23 CoatingȱObjects .................................................................................................................................. 5–23 AssigningȱPropertiesȱtoȱHiddenȱObjects........................................................................................ 5–24 PositioningȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱBuildȱTray .......................................................................................... 5–25 AutomaticȱOrientation...................................................................................................................... 5–25 AutomaticȱPlacement........................................................................................................................ 5–26 ManualȱPositioning ........................................................................................................................... 5–26 ModelȱOrientation............................................................................................................................ 5–26 ManipulatingȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱBuildȱTray ...................................................................................... 5–27 PositioningȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱZȬAxis................................................................................................... 5–27 ValidȱObjectȱPlacement..................................................................................................................... 5–28 UsingȱaȱGridȱtoȱPositionȱObjects ..................................................................................................... 5–30 MeasurementȱUnits ........................................................................................................................... 5–31 SettingȱModelȱDimensions ............................................................................................................... 5–32 RepositioningȱObjects ....................................................................................................................... 5–32 ChangingȱanȱObject’sȱOrientation................................................................................................... 5–34 GroupingȱandȱUngroupingȱObjects ................................................................................................ 5–36 FreezingȱModelȱOrientation............................................................................................................. 5–37 DisplayȱOptions................................................................................................................................ 5–37 ViewingȱObjects ................................................................................................................................. 5–37 ScreenȱLayout..................................................................................................................................... 5–39 TrayȱPerspective ................................................................................................................................ 5–39 SettingȱObjectȱColors......................................................................................................................... 5–41 LoadingȱLargeȱFiles........................................................................................................................... 5–41 LargeȱFileȱManipulation ...................................................................................................................5–42 ZoomȱOptions .................................................................................................................................... 5–44 HandlingȱCompletedȱTrays............................................................................................................ 5–45 TrayȱValidation .................................................................................................................................. 5–45 ProductionȱEstimates ........................................................................................................................ 5–46 PrintingȱModes .................................................................................................................................. 5–47 EȬmailingȱObjetȱDigitalȱFiles............................................................................................................ 5–48 PrintingȱtheȱTrayȱFile ........................................................................................................................ 5–48 ApplyingȱAdditionalȱObjetȱStudioȱFeatures ................................................................................ 5–51 DividingȱObjects ................................................................................................................................ 5–51 ChoosingȱtheȱSupportȱStrength ....................................................................................................... 5–52 “Hollow”—ȱFillingȱModelsȱwithȱSupportȱMaterial...................................................................... 5–53 DisplayingȱtheȱCrossȱSectionȱofȱObjects......................................................................................... 5–54 SavingȱtheȱScreenȱDisplayȱasȱanȱImage File .................................................................................. 5–55 ExportingȱandȱImportingȱObjetȱBuildȱTrays ................................................................................. 5–56 vi User Guide CustomizingȱObjetȱStudio .............................................................................................................. 5–57 CreatingȱaȱQuickȱAccessȱToolbar.................................................................................................... 5–57 HidingȱtheȱRibbon ............................................................................................................................ 5–58 DisplayȱColors ................................................................................................................................... 5–59 KeyboardȱShortcuts .......................................................................................................................... 5–60 SettingȱUserȱPreferences .................................................................................................................. 5–61 ProfessionalȱModeȱFeatures ........................................................................................................... 5–62 DefaultȱSettings ................................................................................................................................. 5–63 OpenGLȱDriverȱConfiguration ....................................................................................................... 5–64 GettingȱAdditionalȱObjetȱStudioȱAssistance................................................................................ 5–66 ObjetȱStudioȱVersion,ȱMaterialȱModuleȱandȱLicensedȱFeatures ............................................... 5–66 MonitoringȱandȱManagingȱPrintȱJobs ........................................................................................... 5–68 JobȱManagerȱScreen .......................................................................................................................... 5–68 SettingȱtheȱPrinterȱConnection........................................................................................................ 5–70 OffȬlineȱMode .................................................................................................................................... 5–71 SettingȱtheȱRemoteȱPrinterȱConnectionȱ(ClientȱMode)................................................................ 5–73 JobȱManagerȱCommands ................................................................................................................. 5–73 ConfiguringȱUserȱAlerts................................................................................................................... 5–76 PrintingȱtheȱTray ............................................................................................................................... 5–77 AdditionalȱServerȱFeatures.............................................................................................................. 5–77 Operatingȱ&ȱMaintainingȱtheȱStratasysȱP750Kȱ3D Printer StartingȱtheȱPrinter ............................................................................................................................ 6–2 LoadingȱModelȱandȱSupportȱCartridges ........................................................................................ 6–4 ProducingȱModels.............................................................................................................................. 6–5 PreparingȱtheȱPrinter .......................................................................................................................... 6–5 PrinterȱInterfaceȱColor Key................................................................................................................ 6–7 PrintingȱIndicators .............................................................................................................................. 6–8 ResumingȱProductionȱAfterȱPrintingȱhasȱStopped ....................................................................... 6–9 ChangingȱtheȱPrintingȱMaterial..................................................................................................... 6–11 AdvancedȱSettings ............................................................................................................................ 6–14 KeepingȱtheȱPrinterȱinȱIdleȱMode .................................................................................................. 6–16 ShuttingȱDownȱtheȱPrinter ............................................................................................................. 6–17 MaintainingȱtheȱPrinter................................................................................................................... 6–19 RoutineȱMaintenanceȱSchedule....................................................................................................... 6–19 UVȱLampȱCheck ................................................................................................................................ 6–20 CleaningȱtheȱPrintȱHeadsȱandȱtheȱRoller....................................................................................... 6–20 CleaningȱandȱReplacingȱtheȱWiper ................................................................................................ 6–23 PatternȱTest ........................................................................................................................................ 6–25 ImprovingȱPrintȱQuality .................................................................................................................. 6–26 CleaningȱtheȱRollerȱWasteȱCollectorȱandȱInspectingȱtheȱRollerȱScraper .................................. 6–27 ReplacingȱtheȱRollerȱScraper ........................................................................................................... 6–30 AligningȱtheȱPrintȱHeads ................................................................................................................. 6–32 Optimizingȱ(Calibrating)ȱPrintȱHeads ........................................................................................... 6–35 ReplacingȱPrint Heads...................................................................................................................... 6–42 TestingȱandȱCalibratingȱtheȱUVȱLamps ......................................................................................... 6–53 CalibratingȱtheȱLoadȱCells ............................................................................................................... 6–59 ReplacingȱtheȱOdorȱFilter ................................................................................................................ 6–61 ReplacingȱtheȱUVȱLamps ................................................................................................................. 6–61 BuiltȬinȱTests ...................................................................................................................................... 6–66 ReplacingȱtheȱWasteȱContainer....................................................................................................... 6–71 CleaningȱtheȱExteriorȱPanels ........................................................................................................... 6–73 HandlingȱPrintedȱModels RemovingȱModelsȱAfterȱPrinting .................................................................................................... 7–2 RemovingȱtheȱSupportȱMaterial ...................................................................................................... 7–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) vii Stratasys P750K User Guide PostȬPrintingȱTreatmentȱforȱModelsȱPrintedȱwithȱObjetȱVeroClear........................................... 7–4 PhotoȬBleachingȱInstructions............................................................................................................. 7–4 StoringȱModels ................................................................................................................................... 7–5 viii About This Guide UsingȱThisȱGuide................................................................................. 2 ForȱMoreȱInformation ......................................................................... 2 TermsȱUsedȱinȱThisȱGuide.................................................................. 3 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 1–1 About This Guide Using This Guide Thisȱuserȱguideȱprovidesȱinstructionsȱforȱinstalling,ȱoperatingȱandȱ maintainingȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprintingȱsystems.ȱItȱexplainsȱhowȱtoȱuseȱfeatures,ȱ andȱprovidesȱpracticalȱexamplesȱtoȱguideȱyouȱasȱyouȱuseȱtheȱsystem. Theȱtextȱandȱfiguresȱinȱthisȱguideȱareȱbasedȱonȱtheȱ3Dȱprinter,ȱprinterȱ softwareȱversionȱ85.1.0ȱandȱObjetȱStudioȱsoftwareȱversionȱ9.2. Thisȱguideȱassumesȱthat— • allȱtheȱhardware,ȱsoftware,ȱandȱnetworkȱcomponentsȱofȱyourȱStratasysȱ systemȱareȱinstalled,ȱconfigured,ȱandȱoperatingȱcorrectly. • theȱoperatorȱhasȱaȱworkingȱknowledgeȱofȱtheȱWindows®ȱPCȱplatform. For More I nformation Visitȱhttp://www.stratasys.com/ȱforȱmoreȱdetailsȱaboutȱObjetȱprinterȱ technology,ȱproductsȱandȱconsumables,ȱandȱforȱserviceȱandȱsupportȱ contacts. ForȱotherȱdocumentsȱthatȱrelateȱtoȱStratasysȱP750Kȱ3Dȱprintingȱsystems,ȱ andȱforȱthisȱdocumentȱinȱotherȱlanguages,ȱcontactȱyourȱregionalȱStratasysȱ CustomerȱSupportȱoffice. Ifȱyouȱhaveȱanyȱquestionsȱaboutȱtheȱinformationȱpresentedȱinȱthisȱ document,ȱorȱifȱyouȱhaveȱanyȱcommentsȱorȱsuggestionsȱforȱfutureȱeditions,ȱ pleaseȱsendȱaȱmessageȱtoȱcȬsupport@stratasys.com. 1–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Terms Used in This Guide buildȱtray InȱObjetȱStudio:ȱTheȱsurfaceȱdisplayedȱonȱtheȱscreenȱthatȱ representsȱtheȱactualȱbuildȱtrayȱinȱtheȱprinter. Inȱtheȱprinter:ȱTheȱsurfaceȱuponȱwhichȱmodelsȱareȱproduced. cleaningȱfluid Cleanserȱforȱflushingȱmaterialȱfeedȱtubesȱandȱtheȱprintingȱ block,ȱusedȱtoȱcompletelyȱremoveȱModelȱandȱSupportȱ materialȱfromȱtheȱsystemȱbeforeȱloadingȱanotherȱtypeȱofȱ materialȱinȱtheȱprinterȱandȱbeforeȱlongȬtermȱshutdown.ȱTheȱ cleaningȱfluidȱisȱsuppliedȱinȱstandardȱmaterialȱcartridges. client/userȱworkstation TheȱworkstationȱonȱwhichȱObjetȱsoftwareȱisȱinstalled,ȱusedȱ forȱpreparingȱbuildȱtraysȱforȱproductionȱonȱObjetȱprinters.ȱ (Thereȱisȱnoȱlimitȱtoȱtheȱnumberȱofȱclientȱworkstationsȱinȱtheȱ localȱnetwork.) Connex™ Theȱtechnologyȱofȱprintingȱmodelsȱbyȱjettingȱmultipleȱ materialsȱsimultaneouslyȱfromȱtheȱprintȱheads.ȱThisȱ technologyȱenablesȱStratasysȱP750Kȱprintersȱtoȱprintȱinȱ DigitalȱMaterialȱmode. DigitalȱMaterial™ Combinationsȱofȱmodelȱmaterialsȱfabricatedȱinȱtheȱprinterȱ fromȱtheȱtwoȱbasicȱmodelȱmaterialsȱinstalled. DigitalȱMaterialȱMode Theȱprinterȱmodeȱusedȱtoȱprintȱaȱjobȱusingȱtwoȱdifferentȱ modelȱmaterials.ȱ(Thisȱmodeȱcanȱalsoȱbeȱusedȱtoȱeliminateȱtheȱ needȱforȱperformingȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱprocedureȱ whenȱprintingȱwithȱaȱsingleȱmodelȱmaterial.) host/serverȱworkstation TheȱworkstationȱthatȱinterfacesȱdirectlyȱwithȱtheȱStratasysȱ printerȱandȱisȱtypicallyȱpositionedȱnextȱtoȱit. JobȱManager™ TheȱpartȱofȱObjetȱStudioȱsoftwareȱthatȱmanagesȱproductionȱ jobsȱbeforeȱtheyȱareȱsentȱtoȱtheȱStratasysȱprinter.ȱ mixedȱpart Modelsȱwhoseȱpartsȱareȱprintedȱusingȱmoreȱthanȱoneȱmodelȱ material. mixedȱtray Aȱbuildȱtrayȱcontainingȱobjects,ȱeachȱofȱwhichȱisȱdesignedȱtoȱ beȱprintedȱusingȱaȱdifferentȱmodelȱmaterial. Modelȱmaterial Materialȱusedȱforȱbuildingȱmodels. ObjetȱStudio™ Theȱsoftwareȱwithȱwhichȱusersȱprepareȱjobsȱforȱproducingȱ models. OBJDFȱ(ObjetȱDigitalȱFormat) Theȱextensionȱofȱaȱfileȱthatȱcontainsȱinformationȱaboutȱtheȱ geometryȱofȱanȱobjectȱandȱtheȱmaterialsȱrequiredȱtoȱprintȱit.ȱ objdfȱfilesȱareȱcreatedȱinȱObjetȱStudio. OBJTFȱ(ObjetȱTrayȱFormat) DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Theȱextensionȱofȱaȱfileȱthatȱcontainsȱallȱofȱtheȱinformationȱ neededȱforȱaȱmodelȬprintingȱjobȱonȱObjetȱ3Dȱprinters.ȱAnȱobjtfȱ fileȱisȱusedȱtoȱsendȱaȱprintȱjobȱtoȱanȱObjetȱ3Dȱprinter. 1–3 About This Guide OBJZFȱ(ObjetȱZȱFormat) Theȱextensionȱofȱaȱcompressedȱ“wrapper”ȱfileȱcontainingȱallȱ ofȱtheȱfilesȱusedȱinȱanȱObjetȱStudioȱbuildȱtray.ȱUsingȱobjzfȱfiles,ȱ aȱprintingȱjobȱcanȱbeȱsavedȱasȱaȱsingleȱfile,ȱforȱconvenientȱ storageȱandȱtransfer. Objet™ȱprinter TheȱObjetȱ3Dȱprinterȱreferredȱtoȱinȱthisȱguide. Printerȱcomputer TheȱcomputerȱinsideȱtheȱStratasysȱprinterȱthatȱoperatesȱit.ȱ (Thisȱisȱsometimesȱreferredȱtoȱasȱtheȱ“embedded”ȱcomputer.) Printerȱinterface TheȱGUIȱ(graphicalȱuserȱinterface)ȱusedȱforȱcontrollingȱtheȱ Stratasysȱprinter. Printerȱsoftware SoftwareȱrunningȱonȱtheȱcomputerȱinsideȱtheȱStratasysȱ printer,ȱthatȱcontrolsȱallȱprinterȱoperations. resin Theȱbaseȱsubstanceȱfromȱwhichȱphotopolymerȱprintingȱ materialsȱareȱmadeȱforȱuseȱinȱStratasysȱprinters.ȱInȱObjetȱ StudioȱandȱprinterȬapplicationȱscreens,ȱ“resin”ȱrefersȱtoȱ cartridgesȱofȱmodelȱandȱsupportȱmaterials. SLC AȱfileȱtypeȱusedȱwithȱObjetȱsoftware.ȱ(Theseȱfilesȱareȱbitmapsȱ ofȱindividualȱslicesȱofȱtheȱobject.ȱForȱmoreȱinformation,ȱseeȱ page 3Ȭ3.) STL AȱfileȱtypeȱusedȱwithȱObjetȱsoftware.ȱ(Forȱmoreȱinformation,ȱ seeȱpage 3Ȭ3.) Supportȱmaterial Materialȱusedȱforȱsupportingȱtheȱstructureȱofȱmodelsȱduringȱ production. 1–4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Safety SafetyȱFeatures............................................................................................. 2 SymbolsȱandȱWarningȱLabels .................................................................... 3 SafetyȱGuidelines......................................................................................... 4 PrinterȱInstallation ......................................................................................... 4 PrinterȱOperation ........................................................................................... 4 UVȱRadiation .................................................................................................. 4 PrinterȱMaintenance ...................................................................................... 4 ModelȱandȱSupportȱMaterials ...................................................................... 5 UVȱLamps........................................................................................................ 5 FirstȱAidȱforȱWorkingȱwithȱPrintingȱMaterials ....................................... 6 WasteȱDisposal............................................................................................. 7 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 2–1 Safety Safety Features Stratasysȱ3DȱprintersȱareȱdesignedȱtoȱcomplyȱwithȱCEȱandȱFCCȱstandards.ȱ Theyȱareȱequippedȱwithȱtheȱfollowingȱsafetyȱfeatures: CoverȱInterlockȱ Switch TheȱpowerȱsuppliedȱtoȱtheȱUVȱlampȱandȱtheȱ motionȱmotorsȱisȱturnedȱoffȱwhenȱtheȱcoverȱisȱ opened. WARNING:ȱDoȱnotȱdefeatȱ(override)ȱtheȱ interlockȱswitch.ȱDoingȱsoȱcouldȱresultȱinȱ seriousȱpersonalȱinjury.ȱIfȱtheȱinterlockȱswitchȱ doesȱnotȱfunctionȱcorrectly,ȱdoȱnotȱuseȱtheȱ printer,ȱandȱcontactȱyourȱserviceȱprovider. SafetyȱLock Theȱcoverȱisȱlockedȱwhileȱtheȱprinterȱisȱ working.ȱTheȱlockȱisȱreleasedȱwhenȱtheȱprinterȱ revertsȱtoȱpauseȱorȱstopȱmode. WARNING:ȱDoȱnotȱdefeatȱ(override)ȱtheȱ safetyȱlock.ȱDoingȱsoȱcouldȱresultȱinȱseriousȱ personalȱinjury.ȱ Ifȱtheȱsafetyȱlockȱdoesȱnotȱfunctionȱcorrectly,ȱdoȱ notȱuseȱtheȱprinter,ȱandȱcontactȱyourȱserviceȱ provider. UVȱScreeningȱ Theȱtransparentȱsectionȱofȱtheȱcoverȱblocksȱ harmfulȱUVȱradiation,ȱallowingȱtheȱoperatorȱtoȱ viewȱtheȱmodelȱasȱitȱisȱbeingȱmade. CircuitȱBreaker Theȱpowerȱtoȱtheȱprinterȱisȱturnedȱoffȱinȱcaseȱofȱ electricalȱovercurrent.ȱ Note: The circuit breaker is only accessible to service personnel. UVȬLampȱ Overheatingȱ Protection TheȱpowerȱsuppliedȱtoȱtheȱUVȱlampȱandȱtheȱ motionȱmotorsȱisȱturnedȱoffȱifȱtheȱtemperatureȱ aroundȱtheȱlampȱreachesȱ90ȱ°Cȱ(194ȱ°F).ȱ A label onȱtheȱUVȬlampȱcoverȱindicatesȱifȱtheȱ temperatureȱhasȱexceededȱ65ȱ°Cȱ(150ȱ°F). GroundedȱChassis Theȱchassisȱofȱtheȱprinterȱisȱgrounded,ȱtoȱ preventȱelectricalȱshock. Note: The power outlet must be properly grounded, in accordance with the local electric code, to provide this protection. UV screen If the Stratasys 3D printing system is not used as specified in this guide, the safety features may not provide adequate protection. 2–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Symbols and Warning Labels ThisȱfollowingȱtableȱlistsȱtheȱwarningȱlabelsȱlocatedȱonȱorȱinȱStratasysȱ printers. Warning Symbol DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Meaning Location Comments Hazardȱ (general) Onȱtheȱnameȱplateȱ onȱtheȱbackȱofȱtheȱ printer. Readȱtheȱinstructionsȱ inȱthisȱdocumentȱ beforeȱoperatingȱtheȱ printer. Hotȱsurfaceȱ OnȱtheȱprintȬheadȱ block. Riskȱofȱburns.ȱDoȱnotȱ touchȱthisȱsurfaceȱ afterȱprinting. Highȱvoltageȱ NearȱtheȱUVȱlampȱ connectors. NearȱtheȱpowerȬ supplyȱenclosures. Riskȱofȱelectricȱshock. Ultravioletȱ radiation NearȱtheȱUVȱlamps. Riskȱofȱinjuryȱfromȱ ultravioletȱradiation. 2–3 Safety Safety Guidelines Theȱfollowingȱgeneralȱguidelines,ȱtogetherȱwithȱtheȱinstructionsȱprovidedȱ throughoutȱthisȱuserȱguide,ȱensureȱuserȱsafetyȱwhileȱoperatingȱandȱ maintainingȱtheȱsystem.ȱIfȱtheȱsystemȱisȱnotȱoperatedȱasȱspecified,ȱtheȱ userȇsȱsafetyȱmayȱbeȱcompromised. Printer I nstallation ¾ Installationȱandȱremovalȱofȱtheȱprinterȱshouldȱonlyȱbeȱdoneȱbyȱqualifiedȱ serviceȱpersonnel.ȱ ¾ Connectȱtheȱprinterȱ(andȱtheȱUPSȱunit)ȱtoȱtheȱelectricȱoutletȱusingȱaȱ powerȱcordȱthatȱisȱsafetyȬcertified. ¾ Theȱelectricȱoutletȱshouldȱbeȱeasilyȱaccessible,ȱnearȱtheȱprinter. ¾ Neverȱconnectȱtheȱpowerȱplugȱtoȱanȱoutletȱthatȱdoesȱnotȱhaveȱaȱgroundȱ (earth)ȱwire,ȱandȱneverȱdisconnectȱtheȱground.ȱDoingȱsoȱmightȱexposeȱ theȱoperatorȱtoȱseriousȱdangerȱfromȱelectricȱshock. ¾ TheȱfollowingȱsafetyȱstatementȱisȱfollowedȱbyȱtranslationsȱtoȱFinish,ȱ Norwegian,ȱSwedishȱandȱDanish,ȱasȱrequiredȱbyȱlocalȱregulations: “Theȱmachineȱmustȱbeȱconnectedȱtoȱaȱgroundedȱpowerȱoutlet.” FI:ȱLaiteȱonȱliitettäväȱsuojakoskettimillaȱvarustettuunȱpistorasiaan. NO:ȱApparatetȱmåȱtilkoplesȱjordetȱstikkontakt. SE:ȱApparatenȱskallȱanslutasȱtillȱjordatȱuttag. DK:ȱApparatetsȱstikpropȱskalȱtilsluttesȱenȱstikkontaktȱmedȱjord,ȱsomȱ giverȱforbindelseȱtilȱstikproppensȱjord. ¾ Leaveȱaȱminimumȱofȱ15ȱcentimetersȱbetweenȱventilationȱopeningsȱandȱ wallsȱorȱotherȱobjects. Printer Operation ¾ TheȱprinterȱshouldȱonlyȱbeȱoperatedȱbyȱpersonsȱtrainedȱbyȱaȱStratasysȱ customerȬsupportȱrepresentative. ¾ Allȱpersonnelȱoperatingȱorȱmaintainingȱtheȱprinterȱshouldȱknowȱtheȱ locationȱofȱfirstȱaidȱandȱemergencyȱequipmentȱandȱhowȱtoȱuseȱit.ȱNeverȱ blockȱaccessȱtoȱthisȱequipment. ¾ Keepȱfingersȱandȱotherȱbodyȱpartsȱclearȱofȱtheȱprinterȱcoverȱwhenȱ closingȱit. ¾ Neverȱattemptȱtoȱopenȱtheȱprinterȱcoverȱwhileȱitȱisȱworking. ¾ Neverȱoverrideȱtheȱinterlockȱsafetyȱswitch. ¾ Ifȱtheȱinterlockȱsafetyȱswitchȱeverȱfails,ȱdoȱnotȱuseȱtheȱprinter.ȱ ¾ Severalȱpartsȱofȱtheȱprinterȱremainȱextremelyȱhotȱevenȱafterȱitȱhasȱ stoppedȱoperating.ȱAvoidȱtouchingȱtheȱUVȱlampsȱandȱtheȱprintȱblock. UV Radiation TheȱUVȱlampsȱusedȱinȱtheȱprinterȱemitȱdangerousȱradiation.ȱ ¾ IfȱtheȱUVȱlampsȱremainȱonȱwhenȱtheȱprinterȱisȱopen,ȱdoȱnotȱstareȱ directlyȱatȱtheȱUVȱlight.ȱShutȱdownȱtheȱprinterȱandȱcallȱyourȱStratasysȱ serviceȱprovider. Printer Maintenance ¾ Serviceȱoperationsȱshouldȱbeȱperformedȱonlyȱbyȱqualifiedȱpersonnelȱ whoȱhaveȱbeenȱinstructedȱinȱrelevantȱsafetyȱprecautions. ¾ NotifyȱcoȬworkersȱandȱthoseȱwhoȱhaveȱaccessȱtoȱtheȱStratasysȱsystemȱ beforeȱbeginningȱnonȬroutineȱandȱhazardousȱwork. Report any potential dangers and safety-related accidents to your safety officer or to other appropriate authorities. 2–4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Model and Support Materials Modelȱandȱsupportȱmaterialsȱareȱmadeȱofȱchemicalȱsubstances.ȱAlthoughȱ precautionsȱmustȱbeȱtakenȱwhenȱhandlingȱtheseȱmaterialsȱdirectly,ȱallȱ modelȱandȱsupportȱmaterialsȱusedȱbyȱtheȱStratasysȱsystemȱareȱhandledȱinȱ sealedȱcartridges.ȱNormally,ȱoperatorsȱofȱtheȱprinterȱshouldȱneverȱbeȱ directlyȱexposedȱtoȱhazardousȱmaterials.ȱInȱtheȱunlikelyȱeventȱofȱaȱleakȱorȱ spill,ȱfollowȱtheȱinstructionsȱthatȱareȱincludedȱwithȱtheȱprintingȬmaterialȱ cartridgeȱused. ¾ Storeȱmodelȱandȱsupportȱmaterialsȱindoors,ȱinȱaȱdryȱareaȱwithȱadequateȱ ventilation,ȱbetweenȱ16Ȭ27ȱdegreesȱCelsiusȱ(60Ȭ81ȱdegreesȱFahrenheit).ȱ Neverȱexposeȱthemȱtoȱflames,ȱheat,ȱsparks,ȱorȱdirectȱsunlight. ¾ Keepȱmodelȱandȱsupportȱmaterialsȱawayȱfromȱareasȱwhereȱfoodȱandȱ drinkȱareȱstored,ȱpreparedȱandȱconsumed. ¾ Uncuredȱprintingȱmaterialȱisȱconsideredȱaȱhazardousȱsubstance,ȱ requiringȱcertainȱprecautionsȱwhenȱdirectlyȱhandlingȱit.ȱToȱpreventȱskinȱ irritation,ȱwearȱneopreneȱorȱnitrileȱgloves.ȱIfȱthereȱisȱanyȱchanceȱthatȱ modelȱandȱsupportȱmaterialsȱmightȱsplashȱintoȱtheȱeyes,ȱwearȱsafetyȱ goggles.ȱProlongedȱdirectȱcontactȱwithȱprintingȱmaterialsȱcanȱcauseȱanȱ allergicȱreaction. ¾ WhenȱhandlingȱUVȬcuredȱmodelsȱthatȱmayȱnotȱbeȱcompletelyȱcuredȱonȱ theȱsurface,ȱcommonȱlatexȱglovesȱareȱadequate.ȱ ¾ Toȱpreventȱrespiratoryȱirritation,ȱventilateȱareasȱwhereȱmodelȱandȱ supportȱmaterialsȱareȱused.ȱIfȱtheȱprinterȱisȱnotȱequippedȱwithȱanȱ exhaustȱduct,ȱtheȱroomȱventilationȱsystemȱshouldȱreplaceȱtheȱairȱatȱleastȱ 20ȱtimesȱperȱhour.ȱ ¾ CleanȱupȱmodelȬmaterialȱandȱsupportȬmaterialȱspillsȱwithȱdisposableȱ towelsȱorȱotherȱabsorbent,ȱnonȬreusableȱmaterial,ȱsuchȱasȱsawdustȱorȱ activatedȱcharcoal.ȱRinseȱtheȱspillȱareaȱwithȱdenaturedȱorȱisopropylȱ alcoholȱ(IPA),ȱfollowedȱbyȱsoapȱandȱwater.ȱDisposeȱofȱtheȱabsorbentȱ materialȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱlocalȱregulations. ¾ Doȱnotȱwashȱcontaminatedȱclothingȱatȱhome;ȱclothingȱshouldȱbeȱ professionallyȱlaundered. ¾ Disposeȱofȱcontaminatedȱshoes,ȱbeltsȱandȱotherȱleatherȱitemsȱinȱ accordanceȱwithȱanyȱapplicableȱregulations.ȱAbsorbedȱprintingȱ materialȱmayȱreȬexposeȱtheȱuserȱwhenȱtheseȱitemsȱareȱworn. UV Lamps UVȱlampsȱusedȱbyȱtheȱprinterȱtoȱcureȱprintingȱmaterialsȱcontainȱaȱsmallȱ amountȱofȱmercury.ȱInȱtheȱunlikelyȱeventȱofȱlampȱbreakage,ȱavoidȱinhalingȱ mercuryȱvapor,ȱandȱventilateȱtheȱroom.ȱIfȱtheȱlampȱrupturesȱ(breaks)ȱ duringȱoperation,ȱleaveȱtheȱroomȱandȱventilateȱitȱthoroughlyȱ(forȱaboutȱ30ȱ minutes).ȱ Useȱprotectiveȱglovesȱtoȱpreventȱcontactȱwithȱmercuryȱandȱotherȱlampȱ components.ȱCarefullyȱremoveȱspilledȱmercuryȱwithȱaȱmethodȱthatȱ preventsȱtheȱgenerationȱofȱmercuryȱvapor,ȱsuchȱasȱaȱsyringe,ȱpackingȱtapeȱ orȱpaper.ȱ Placeȱtheȱbrokenȱlamp,ȱmercuryȱandȱcontaminatedȱmaterialsȱinȱanȱairȬtight,ȱ nonȬmetallicȱcontainer.ȱDisposeȱofȱtheȱcontainerȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱ applicableȱregulations. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 2–5 Safety First Aid for Working with Printing Materials Inȱgeneral,ȱtryȱtoȱavoidȱdirectȱcontactȱwithȱuncuredȱprintingȱmaterial.ȱIfȱ skinȱorȱeyesȱcomeȱintoȱcontactȱwithȱit,ȱwashȱtheȱareaȱimmediatelyȱandȱ thoroughlyȱwithȱwater,ȱandȱfollowȱtheseȱfirstȬaidȱinstructions. The Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) that accompanies printing materials contains important safety information. Keep this in an accessible place where these materials are used and stored. Contact with Skin Ifȱuncuredȱprintingȱmaterialȱcomesȱinȱcontactȱwithȱskin,ȱwashȱtheȱaffectedȱ areaȱimmediatelyȱandȱthoroughlyȱwithȱsoapȱandȱcoolȱwater,ȱthenȱremoveȱ contaminatedȱclothing.ȱPayȱparticularȱattentionȱtoȱflushingȱtheȱhair,ȱears,ȱ noseȱandȱotherȱpartsȱofȱtheȱbodyȱthatȱareȱnotȱeasilyȱcleaned.ȱ ¾ Useȱcoolȱwaterȱtoȱpreventȱskinȱporesȱfromȱopening,ȱsoȱthatȱtheȱliquidȱ materialȱdoesȱnotȱeasilyȱpenetrateȱtheȱskin.ȱ ¾ Doȱnotȱuseȱsolventsȱtoȱcleanȱskin.ȱ ¾ Ifȱlargeȱareasȱofȱskinȱhaveȱbeenȱexposed,ȱorȱifȱprolongedȱcontactȱresultsȱ inȱblisters,ȱseekȱmedicalȱattention.ȱInȱanyȱcase,ȱifȱirritationȱpersists,ȱseekȱ medicalȱattention. ¾ Avoidȱtheȱaccidentalȱtransferȱofȱprintingȱmaterialȱfromȱtheȱhandsȱtoȱ otherȱareasȱofȱtheȱbody,ȱespeciallyȱtoȱtheȱeyes.ȱ ¾ Ifȱprotectiveȱcreamȱwasȱused,ȱdoȱnotȱreapplyȱitȱuntilȱtheȱskinȱhasȱbeenȱ completelyȱcleansed. Contact with Eyes Ifȱuncuredȱprintingȱmaterialȱcomesȱinȱcontactȱwithȱtheȱeyes,ȱflushȱ immediatelyȱwithȱlargeȱamountsȱofȱwaterȱforȱ15ȱminutesȱandȱseekȱmedicalȱ attention.ȱ ¾ Avoidȱsunlight,ȱfluorescentȱlight,ȱandȱotherȱsourcesȱofȱultravioletȱ radiation. Wearingȱcontactȱlensesȱwhenȱhandlingȱliquidȱprintingȱmaterialsȱisȱnotȱ recommended.ȱIfȱtheȱliquidȱsplashesȱintoȱtheȱeyesȱwhenȱcontactȱlensesȱareȱ worn,ȱimmediatelyȱremoveȱtheȱlensesȱandȱflushȱtheȱeyesȱwithȱwater.ȱ ¾ Cleanȱandȱdisinfectȱtheȱcontaminatedȱlenses. ¾ Doȱnotȱwearȱcontactȱlensesȱuntilȱeyeȱirritationȱdisappears. I ngestion Ifȱprintingȱmaterialȱisȱswallowed,ȱreferȱtoȱtheȱinstructionsȱincludedȱwithȱtheȱ cartridge.ȱSeekȱmedicalȱattentionȱimmediately. I nhalation Vaporsȱfromȱprintingȱmaterialsȱcanȱbeȱirritatingȱtoȱtheȱrespiratoryȱsystem.ȱ Ifȱrespiratoryȱirritationȱoccurs,ȱexposeȱtheȱvictimȱtoȱfreshȱairȱimmediately. ¾ Ifȱtheȱvictimȱhasȱstoppedȱbreathing,ȱperformȱartificialȱrespirationȱorȱ cardiopulmonaryȱresuscitation.ȱ ¾ Seekȱmedicalȱattentionȱimmediately. ¾ Keepȱtheȱvictimȱwarmȱbutȱnotȱhot.ȱ ¾ Neverȱfeedȱanythingȱbyȱmouthȱtoȱanȱunconsciousȱperson. ¾ Oxygenȱshouldȱbeȱadministeredȱbyȱauthorizedȱpersonnelȱonly. 2–6 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Waste Disposal Fullyȱcuredȱprintedȱmodelsȱcanȱbeȱdisposedȱofȱasȱordinaryȱofficeȱtrash.ȱ However,ȱspecialȱcareȱisȱrequiredȱwhenȱhandlingȱprinterȱwasteȱ(uncuredȱ printingȱmaterial). Printing Materials ¾ WhenȱremovingȱtheȱwasteȱcontainerȱfromȱtheȱStratasysȱprinter,ȱwearȱ neopreneȱorȱnitrileȱgloves. ¾ Toȱpreventȱliquidȱwasteȱfromȱsplashingȱintoȱtheȱeyes,ȱwearȱsafetyȱ goggles. ¾ LiquidȱwasteȱfromȱtheȱStratasysȱprinterȱisȱclassifiedȱasȱhazardousȱ industrialȱwaste.ȱTherefore,ȱprintingȬmaterialȱwasteȱmustȱbeȱpackagedȱ andȱdisposedȱofȱinȱaȱmannerȱthatȱpreventsȱhumanȱcontactȱwithȱitȱandȱ contaminationȱofȱwaterȱsources. ¾ EmptyȱmodelȬmaterialȱandȱsupportȬmaterialȱcartridgesȱcontainȱresidueȱ ofȱtheirȱcontents.ȱSomeȱleakageȱofȱthisȱresidueȱmayȱoccurȱthroughȱtheȱ brokenȱcartridgeȱseal.ȱTherefore,ȱhandleȱandȱstoreȱemptyȱcartridgesȱ withȱcare.ȱ ¾ Doȱnotȱattemptȱtoȱreuseȱemptyȱcartridges,ȱandȱdoȱnotȱpunctureȱthem. ¾ Disposeȱofȱusedȱcartridgesȱandȱwasteȱcontainersȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱ localȱregulations. ¾ Discardȱcontaminatedȱclothing,ȱshoes,ȱemptyȱcontainers,ȱetc.,ȱinȱ accordanceȱwithȱanyȱapplicableȱregulations. UV Lamps UVȱlampsȱusedȱbyȱtheȱprinterȱtoȱcureȱprintingȱmaterialsȱcontainȱaȱsmallȱ amountȱofȱmercury,ȱandȱareȱconsideredȱ“UniversalȱWaste.”ȱRecycleȱorȱ discardȱusedȱlampsȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱapplicableȱregulations. Brokenȱlamps:ȱ Afterȱventilatingȱtheȱarea,ȱuseȱprotectiveȱglovesȱandȱcarefullyȱremoveȱ spilledȱmercuryȱwithȱaȱmethodȱthatȱpreventsȱtheȱgenerationȱofȱmercuryȱ vapor,ȱsuchȱasȱaȱsyringe,ȱpackingȱtapeȱorȱpaper.ȱPlaceȱtheȱbrokenȱlamp,ȱ mercuryȱandȱcontaminatedȱmaterialsȱinȱanȱairȬtight,ȱnonȬmetallicȱcontainer.ȱ Disposeȱofȱtheȱcontainerȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱapplicableȱregulations. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 2–7 Safety 2–8 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) I ntroducing the Stratasys P750K 3D Printing System WelcomeȱtoȱConnex .................................................................................... 2 WorkȱConfigurations .................................................................................. 2 SourceȱFiles................................................................................................... 3 STLȱFiles .......................................................................................................... 3 SLCȱFiles .......................................................................................................... 3 ConnexȱWorkflows...................................................................................... 4 PrintingȱMaterials........................................................................................ 5 Storage ............................................................................................................. 5 ShelfȱLife .......................................................................................................... 5 ExposureȱtoȱLight ........................................................................................... 5 SafetyȱConsiderations .................................................................................... 6 Disposal ........................................................................................................... 6 WorkȱEnvironment...................................................................................... 6 WorkstationȱRequirements ........................................................................ 7 PreparingȱFilesȱforȱUseȱwithȱObjetȱ3DȱPrintingȱSystems ...................... 8 ConvertingȱCADȱFilesȱtoȱSTLȱFormat ......................................................... 8 ConvertingȱCADȱFilesȱtoȱSLCȱFormat......................................................... 8 ObjetȱStudioȱSoftware ................................................................................. 9 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 3–1 I ntroducing the Stratasys P750K 3D Printing System Welcome to Connex TheȱadvancedȱcapabilitiesȱofȱConnex™ȱ3Dȱprintingȱsystemsȱareȱmadeȱ possibleȱbyȱtechnologyȱspeciallyȱdevelopedȱbyȱStratasysȱforȱprintingȱ modelsȱsimultaneouslyȱwithȱdifferentȱmodelȱmaterials.ȱ WithȱConnexȱprinters,ȱyouȱcanȱachieveȱtheȱfollowingȱresultsȱwhenȱprintingȱ 3Dȱmodels: • Youȱcanȱprepareȱobjectsȱforȱprintingȱwithȱtwoȱdesignatedȱmodelȱ materialsȱandȱthenȱprintȱthemȱatȱtheȱsameȱtime.ȱThisȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱ assignȱspecificȱmechanicalȱandȱcolorȱpropertiesȱtoȱobjects. • Youȱcanȱprintȱpartsȱofȱtheȱsameȱmodel—simultaneously—withȱdifferentȱ materialsȱ(orȱmaterialȱcombinations). • Youȱcanȱprintȱobjectsȱthatȱhaveȱaȱ“coating”ȱmadeȱfromȱaȱdifferentȱ materialȱthanȱtheȱmainȱpartȱofȱtheȱobject. BecauseȱConnexȱprintersȱcanȱbeȱloadedȱwithȱdifferentȱmaterials,ȱyouȱcanȱ streamlineȱandȱeconomizeȱtheȱprocessȱofȱproducingȱmodels: • Printingȱmodelsȱmadeȱfromȱdifferentȱmaterialsȱonȱtheȱsameȱbuildȱtrayȱ (“mixedȱtray”),ȱinȱtheȱsameȱprintȱjob,ȱeliminatesȱtheȱtimeȬconsumingȱ needȱandȱexpenseȱofȱloadingȱanotherȱmaterial,ȱflushingȱtheȱsystem,ȱandȱ sendingȱaȱseparateȱjobȱtoȱbeȱprinted. ObjetȱStudioȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱsplitȱmodelsȱintoȱcomponentȱpartsȱ(“shells”)ȱsoȱ youȱcanȱisolate,ȱmanipulateȱandȱprintȱpartsȱofȱaȱmodel.ȱThen,ȱyouȱcanȱ assignȱmodelȱmaterialsȱandȱotherȱcharacteristicsȱtoȱtheȱshells.ȱHowever,ȱ youȱhaveȱultimateȱcontrolȱwhenȱseparatingȱmodelsȱintoȱshellsȱbyȱpreparingȱ stlȱfilesȱwithȱyourȱCADȱsoftware. Figure 3-1: The Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Work Configurations TheȱStratasysȱ3DȱprintingȱsystemȱcanȱbeȱsetȱupȱasȱaȱsingleȬstationȱsystemȱorȱ asȱaȱmultiȬstationȱsystem.ȱWhenȱconnectedȱtoȱaȱlocalȱcomputerȱnetwork,ȱtheȱ systemȱcanȱserveȱmultipleȱusers.ȱInȱsuchȱconfigurations,ȱeachȱuserȱ workstationȱ(client)ȱpreparesȱfilesȱwithȱObjetȱStudioȱsoftwareȱforȱ production.ȱAȱserverȱ(host),ȱtypicallyȱnextȱtoȱtheȱ3Dȱprinter,ȱactsȱasȱaȱjobȱ managerȱthatȱsendsȱproductionȱjobsȱtoȱtheȱprinterȱforȱproduction.ȱ Figure 3Ȭ2ȱshowsȱtheȱprinterȱsetȱupȱinȱaȱmultiȬclientȱconfiguration. Figure 3-2: Multi-client network configuration WhenȱinstallingȱObjetȱStudio,ȱyouȱchooseȱwhetherȱtoȱinstallȱitȱasȱaȱclientȱ stationȱorȱasȱaȱmasterȱstationȱ(serverȱorȱstandaloneȱstation). ObjetȱStudioȱarrangesȱtheȱjobsȱitȱreceivesȱaccordingȱtoȱtheirȱpriorities,ȱ modelȬmaterialȱtype,ȱandȱotherȱfactors.ȱInȱmultiȬworkstationȱ configurations,ȱtheȱoperatorȱofȱtheȱserver—typicallyȱtheȱproductionȱ administrator—hasȱtotalȱcontrolȱoverȱtheȱjobsȱsentȱtoȱtheȱ3Dȱprinter,ȱandȱ canȱprioritizeȱandȱdeleteȱjobs,ȱreviewȱjobȱhistoryȱandȱreprintȱaȱjob,ȱandȱsoȱ on. 3–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Source Files Objetȱ3DȱprintingȱsystemsȱproduceȱthreeȬdimensionalȱmodelsȱdesignedȱ withȱmostȱ3DȱCADȱtoolsȱandȱwithȱotherȱjobȬspecificȱ3Dȱapplications.ȱ Stratasysȱsystemsȱaccept: • STLȱFiles • SLCȱFiles Stratasysȱsystemsȱfeatureȱtheȱcapabilityȱofȱproducingȱdifferentȱtypesȱofȱ modelȱfilesȱsimultaneously. STL Files STLȱisȱshortȱforȱStandardȱTriangulationȱLanguage.ȱThisȱlanguageȱviewsȱanyȱ objectȱasȱaȱcollectionȱofȱsurfaces,ȱandȱdescribesȱeachȱsurfaceȱofȱtheȱobjectȱasȱ aȱcollectionȱofȱtriangles.ȱ Forȱexample,ȱaȱsquareȱcanȱbeȱdescribedȱasȱtwoȱtriangles;ȱaȱcubeȱ(sixȱ squares)ȱasȱ12ȱtriangles.ȱCurvedȱsurfacesȱneedȱmoreȱtrianglesȱtoȱdescribeȱ them.ȱTheȱhigherȱtheȱtoleranceȱ(forȱsmoothȱsurfaces),ȱtheȱmoreȱtrianglesȱareȱ needed.ȱTheȱresultȱisȱthatȱhighȬqualityȱobjectȱdescriptionsȱmeanȱveryȱheavyȱ files.ȱ MostȱCADȱsoftwareȱcanȱexportȱSTLȱfiles.ȱTheȱStratasysȱsystemȱutilizesȱ theseȱfilesȱforȱbuildingȱmodelsȱ(rapidȱprototyping),ȱandȱalsoȱforȱdirectlyȱ makingȱmoldsȱforȱmassȬproducingȱitems. STLȱfilesȱcanȱbeȱASCIIȱ(text)ȱfilesȱorȱbinaryȱfiles.ȱTheȱcontentȱofȱtheȱASCIIȱ fileȱbeginsȱwithȱ“solid”ȱandȱendsȱwithȱ“endȬsolid”ȱ(bothȱlowerȱcase).ȱ Betweenȱtheseȱkeywordsȱisȱaȱlistȱofȱtheȱtrianglesȱthatȱdescribesȱtheȱfacesȱofȱ theȱsolidȱmodel.ȱEachȱtriangleȱdefinesȱaȱsingleȱnormalȱvectorȱdirectedȱawayȱ fromȱtheȱsolid’sȱsurface,ȱfollowedȱbyȱitsȱXȬYȬZȱcoordinates.ȱTheseȱareȱ expressedȱasȱCartesianȱcoordinatesȱandȱareȱfloatingȬpointȱvalues.ȱTheȱ coordinatesȱofȱallȱtrianglesȱshouldȱbeȱpositiveȱandȱshouldȱfallȱwithinȱtheȱ volumeȱofȱtheȱmodel.ȱ SLC Files SLCȱisȱshortȱforȱStereoȬLithographyȱContour.ȱSLCȱfilesȱdescribeȱtwoȬ dimensionalȱcontoursȱofȱtheȱthreeȬdimensionalȱmodels.ȱTheseȱcontourȱlinesȱ areȱpolylines.ȱ SLCȱfilesȱareȱASCIIȱ(text)ȱfilesȱthatȱsaveȱmodelsȱasȱaȱseriesȱofȱslices.ȱThisȱ meansȱthatȱmodelsȱbasedȱonȱSLCȱfilesȱcannotȱbeȱorientated;ȱonlyȱtheirȱscaleȱ (size)ȱandȱpositionȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱcanȱbeȱcontrolled.ȱForȱthisȱreason,ȱtheȱ model’sȱorientationȱmustȱbeȱsuitableȱforȱproductionȱbeforeȱitȱisȱsavedȱasȱanȱ SLCȱfile.ȱBecauseȱofȱtheȱnatureȱofȱSLCȱfiles,ȱtheȱappearanceȱofȱmodelsȱinȱ ObjetȱStudioȱmayȱbeȱdifferentȱthanȱtheȱsolidȬobjectȱimagesȱdisplayedȱfromȱ STLȱfiles. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 3–3 I ntroducing the Stratasys P750K 3D Printing System Connex Workflows WithȱConnexȱ3Dȱprintingȱsystems,ȱyouȱhaveȱgreatȱflexibilityȱinȱpreparingȱ modelȱfilesȱandȱprintingȱthem.ȱBelowȱareȱtheȱmajorȱworkflowsȱyouȱcanȱuse.ȱ Detailedȱinstructionsȱforȱimplementingȱtheȱlistedȱtasksȱareȱinȱchapterȱ5ȱ (“UsingȱObjetȱStudio”). Stage CADȱprogram WorkflowȱA WorkflowȱB • Designȱaȱ3Dȱobject. • Designȱaȱ3Dȱobject. • Saveȱitȱasȱaȱsingleȱstlȱ • Saveȱitȱasȱanȱ • Designȱaȱ3Dȱobject. assemblyȱofȱstlȱfiles. file. ObjetȱStudio WorkflowȱC • Openȱ(Insert)ȱtheȱstlȱ • Openȱ(Insert)ȱtheȱstlȱ filesȱasȱanȱassembly. file. • Separateȱtheȱobjectȱ intoȱitsȱcomponentsȱ (“shells”). • Assignȱmaterialsȱtoȱ theȱassembly’sȱ components. • Openȱ(Insert)ȱanȱ objdfȱfile.ȱ (objdfȱfilesȱcontainȱ modelȬmaterialȱ information.) • Assignȱmaterialsȱtoȱ theȱcomponents. •ȱSaveȱtheȱobjectȱasȱanȱobjdfȱfileȱ(optional). •ȱSaveȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱ/ȱSendȱtheȱbuildȱtoȱtheȱprinter. StratasysȱPrinter Modelsȱareȱproducedȱinȱtheȱprinter. •ȱRemoveȱtheȱsupportȱmaterialȱfromȱtheȱmodels. Finishedȱmodel Finishedȱmodel. Connexȱworkflows,ȱfromȱdesignȱtoȱfinishedȱmodels 3–4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Printing Materials Stratasysȱprintersȱproduceȱmodelsȱbyȱjettingȱthinȱlayersȱofȱprintingȱ materialsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱuntilȱtheȱcompleteȱmodelȱisȱformed.ȱTwoȱtypesȱ ofȱmaterialȱareȱusedȱinȱthisȱprocess: • Modelȱmaterial—whichȱmakesȱupȱtheȱfinishedȱmodel • Supportȱmaterial—whichȱfillsȱgapsȱandȱspacesȱinȱtheȱmodelȱduringȱ printing,ȱandȱisȱremovedȱafterȱprinting For up-to-date information about PolyJet printing materials and their properties, go to http://www.stratasys.com/materials/polyjet. Storage MaterialsȱusedȱforȱprintingȱmodelsȱwithȱStratasysȱprintersȱareȱmadeȱofȱ resins,ȱwhichȱareȱcomposedȱofȱreactiveȱmonomersȱandȱoligomers.ȱ Althoughȱprintingȱmaterialsȱareȱsuppliedȱinȱsealed,ȱUVȬproofȱcartridges,ȱ careȱmustȱbeȱtakenȱwhenȱstoringȱandȱhandlingȱthem.ȱFollowȱtheseȱ guidelinesȱtoȱprotectȱoperatorsȱandȱtheȱenvironment,ȱandȱtoȱensureȱ optimumȱresults.ȱ • Toȱensureȱproductȱstability,ȱdoȱnotȱallowȱtheseȱmaterialsȱtoȱcomeȱintoȱ contactȱwithȱmetal.ȱPlasticsȱmadeȱfromȱmonomerȬsolubleȱsubstancesȱ (suchȱasȱpolystyreneȱorȱpolyvinylȱchloride)ȱareȱnotȱsuitableȱforȱstoringȱ PolyJetȱprintingȱmaterials. • Whenȱnotȱinȱuse,ȱkeepȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱtightlyȱsealedȱtoȱpreventȱ contamination,ȱtheȱeffectsȱofȱexposureȱtoȱUVȱradiation,ȱandȱaccidentalȱ spillage.ȱ • Storeȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱindoors,ȱinȱaȱdryȱareaȱwithȱadequateȱ ventilation,ȱbetweenȱ16–27ȱdegreesȱCelsiusȱ(60–81ȱdegreesȱFahrenheit).ȱ Ifȱexposedȱtoȱheatȱorȱflames,ȱcartridgesȱmightȱburstȱorȱignite. • Signsȱofȱprematureȱpolymerizationȱinȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱincludeȱ bulging,ȱleaking,ȱtheȱemissionȱofȱheat,ȱandȱunusualȱodor.ȱExposureȱtoȱ heatȱcanȱcauseȱresinȱtoȱgelȱinȱtheȱcartridge. • Makeȱsureȱthatȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱareȱstoredȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱallȱ localȱregulationsȱandȱotherȱapplicableȱrequirements. Shelf Life Materialsȱusedȱforȱproducingȱmodelsȱhaveȱaȱlimitedȱshelfȱlife.ȱTheȱexpiryȱ dateȱonȱtheȱlabelȱisȱvalidȱwhenȱproperlyȱstoredȱinȱanȱundamaged,ȱ unopenedȱcartridge.ȱAlwaysȱrotateȱyourȱstock,ȱsoȱthatȱtheȱcartridgeȱwithȱ theȱearliestȱdateȱisȱusedȱfirst. Exposure to Light Ifȱprintingȱmaterialsȱareȱnotȱinȱtheirȱsealedȱcartridges,ȱmakeȱsureȱtoȱshieldȱ themȱfromȱsunlightȱandȱotherȱsourcesȱofȱUVȱradiation,ȱsuchȱasȱfluorescentȱ andȱmercuryȬvaporȱlights.ȱExposureȱtoȱUVȱradiationȱcausesȱanȱincreaseȱinȱ viscosityȱand,ȱeventually,ȱsolidification. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 3–5 I ntroducing the Stratasys P750K 3D Printing System Safety Considerations Beforeȱbeingȱcured,ȱresinsȱareȱhazardousȱmaterials.ȱToȱpreventȱpossibleȱ healthȱhazards,ȱfollowȱtheseȱprecautionsȱregardingȱprintingȱmaterials:ȱ • • • • Doȱnotȱexposeȱtoȱflames,ȱheatȱorȱsparks. Preventȱcontactȱwithȱskinȱandȱeyes. Ventilateȱareasȱwhereȱtheyȱareȱhandled.ȱ Keepȱthemȱseparateȱfromȱfoodȱandȱdrink. Curedȱplasticȱparts,ȱhowever,ȱareȱsafe.ȱTheyȱcanȱbeȱhandledȱandȱstoredȱ withoutȱprecautions. You can find more safety information about resins in “Safety Guidelines” on page 2-4, and “First Aid for Working with Printing Materials” on page 2-6. Disposal Disposeȱofȱcartridgesȱofȱmodelȱandȱsupportȱmaterialȱinȱaccordanceȱwithȱallȱ applicableȱlawsȱandȱregulations.ȱIfȱnecessary,ȱtheȱcartridgesȱcanȱbeȱ disassembledȱforȱrecycling.ȱ Work Environment Extremeȱheatȱandȱhumidityȱconditionsȱcanȱadverselyȱaffectȱtheȱoperationȱofȱ theȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprinter.ȱUseȱventilationȱorȱairȬconditioningȱsystems,ȱifȱ necessary,ȱtoȱkeepȱtheȱworkȱareaȱwithinȱtheȱfollowingȱranges: • 18q–25qȱCȱ(64q–77qȱF) • 30%–70%ȱrelativeȱhumidity 3–6 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Workstation Requirements Theȱtableȱbelowȱlistsȱtheȱrequirementsȱforȱcomputerȱcomponentsȱonȱ workstationsȱrunningȱObjetȱStudio. Important:ȱȱMakeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱserverȱworkstationȱisȱsetȱupȱwithȱ Administratorȱprivileges. Requirement Computer Type Server workstation: Standard desktop PC1 Processor Intel® Core™ i3 or better Operating System Windows® 7 or Windows® 8, 64-bit2 RAM 8 GB or more2 Graphics Card3 Open GL® Memory: 1 GB; 2 GB recommended for dental applications For server workstation: VGA connector4 Optical Drive CD/DVD ROM Hard-Disk Drive 80 GB or larger (minimum free space: 40 GB) Network Card LAN TCP/IP (2 for server workstation; 1 for client workstation) Mouse/Keyboard Connection Server workstation: USB1 Monitor Cable VGA connector1 1. ForȱsystemsȱusingȱaȱKVMȱswitchboxȱtoȱcontrolȱbothȱtheȱbuiltȬinȱ printerȱcomputerȱandȱtheȱserverȱworkstationȱwithȱsameȱkeyboardȬ monitorȬmouseȱset:ȱAllȬinȬoneȱcomputer,ȱwirelessȱmouseȱandȱ wirelessȱkeyboardȱcannotȱbeȱused. 2. Aȱ64Ȭbitȱoperatingȱsystemȱisȱrecommended,ȱtoȱutilizeȱ8ȱGBȱofȱ memory.ȱObjet Studioȱrunningȱonȱaȱ32Ȭbitȱapplicationȱcanȱutilizeȱ onlyȱ4ȱGBȱofȱmemory. 3. TheȱfollowingȱgraphicsȱcardsȱwereȱtestedȱinȱStratasysȱlabs: •ȱNVIDIA®ȱQuadro®ȱFamily—FX570,ȱFX1700 •ȱNVIDIA®ȱGeForce®ȱFamily—6200ȱTurboCache™,ȱ7300ȱGT,ȱGTXȱ285 •ȱIntel®ȱExpressȱChipset—82915G/GV,ȱ82910GL,ȱQ965,ȱQ963,ȱQ35,ȱQ45,ȱQ43,ȱ 82852,ȱ82855 •ȱATIȱRadeon™ȱHDȱ5670,ȱHDȱ5970 •ȱAMDȱRadeon™ȱE6760 4. ForȱsystemsȱusingȱaȱKVMȱswitchbox.ȱIfȱtheȱserverȱworkstationȱhasȱ aȱDVIȱvideoȱconnector,ȱaȱVGAȱadapterȱisȱneeded. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 3–7 I ntroducing the Stratasys P750K 3D Printing System Preparing Files for Use with Objet 3D Printing Systems BeforeȱusingȱfilesȱwithȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprintingȱsystems,ȱyouȱneedȱtoȱconvertȱ themȱinȱyourȱCADȱprogramȱtoȱaȱfileȱformatȱsupportedȱbyȱObjetȱStudio.ȱ(Forȱ anȱexplanationȱofȱtheseȱfileȱformats,ȱseeȱ“SourceȱFiles”ȱonȱpage 3.) Converting CAD Files to STL Format Thisȱprocedureȱmayȱvaryȱslightly,ȱdependingȱonȱtheȱCADȱsoftwareȱused,ȱ butȱtheȱfollowingȱinstructionsȱgenerallyȱapply. To convert a file to STL format (in a CAD program): 1. FromȱtheȱFileȱmenu,ȱselectȱSave As. 2. InȱtheȱSaveȱAsȱdialogȱbox,ȱopenȱtheȱSaveȱAsȱTypeȱdropȬdownȱlistȱandȱ selectȱ*.STL. 3. ClickȱOptionsȱandȱsetȱtheȱfollowingȱparameters: • TotalȱQuality—approximatelyȱ0.01ȱmmȱ(deviationȱtoleranceȱ/ȱ linearȬdimensionȱtolerance) • DetailȱQuality—approximatelyȱ5°ȱ(angleȱtolerance) Note: Lowering these values produces more accurate models, but results in larger files and longer loading and processing times. For this reason, it is generally not recommended that you use lower values. 4. Inȱtheȱfileȱformatȱoption,ȱchooseȱbinaryȱorȱASCII.ȱ(Bothȱbinaryȱandȱ ASCIIȱformatsȱcanȱbeȱusedȱinȱObjetȱStudio.ȱHowever,ȱbinaryȱfilesȱareȱ smaller,ȱsoȱthisȱoptionȱisȱrecommended.) 5. ClickȱOKȱorȱSave. Afterȱconvertingȱtheȱmodelȱfiles,ȱitȱisȱrecommendedȱthatȱyouȱcheckȱthemȱforȱ defectsȱinȱanȱSTLȬrepairȱapplicationȱ(suchȱasȱMagics™,ȱbyȱMaterialise®)ȱ beforeȱopeningȱthemȱinȱObjetȱStudioȱandȱproducingȱtheȱmodel. For more information, search for “CAD to STL” on www.stratasys.com. Converting CAD Files to SLC Format 3–8 WhenȱconvertingȱfilesȱtoȱSLCȱformat,ȱitȱisȱrecommendedȱthatȱyouȱsetȱaȱlayerȱ thicknessȱofȱ15ȱmicronsȱ(0.015ȱmm).ȱSinceȱSLCȱfilesȱcannotȱbeȱorientatedȱinȱ ObjetȱStudio,ȱitȱisȱimportantȱthatȱmodelsȱareȱproperlyȱorientatedȱbeforeȱ beingȱsavedȱasȱSLCȱfiles.ȱConsiderationsȱforȱsuitableȱmodelȱorientationȱareȱ explainedȱinȱ“ModelȱOrientation”ȱonȱpage 5Ȭ26. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Objet Studio Software ObjetȱStudioȱsoftwareȱforȱtheȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprintingȱsystemȱconsistsȱofȱtwoȱ mainȱscreens: • TrayȱSettingsȱ/ȱModelȱSettings • JobȱManager Tray Settings / Model Settings InȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱandȱModelȱSettingsȱscreens,ȱyouȱprepareȱsourceȱfilesȱforȱ productionȱinȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprinters.ȱObjetȱStudioȱoffersȱyouȱaȱwideȱvarietyȱ ofȱfileȬpreparationȱoptions,ȱbutȱalwaysȱconsistsȱofȱtheȱfollowingȱbasicȱ procedure: 1. Insertingȱoneȱorȱmoreȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray 2. Positioningȱtheȱobject(s)ȱonȱtheȱtray 3. Configuringȱobjectȱandȱtrayȱparameters 4. Savingȱtheȱtrayȱconfigurationȱasȱanȱobjtfȱ(ObjetȱTrayȱFormat)ȱfile 5. SendingȱtheȱobjtfȱfileȱtoȱtheȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprinterȱforȱproduction UsingȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱperformȱtheseȱtasksȱisȱdescribedȱinȱdetailȱinȱchapter 5,ȱ “UsingȱObjetȱStudio.” Job Manager TheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱisȱdifferentȱforȱclientȱworkstationsȱandȱforȱtheȱ computerȱconnectedȱdirectlyȱtoȱtheȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprinter.ȱ • InȱObjetȱStudioȱinstalledȱonȱtheȱdirectlyȬconnectedȱcomputerȱ(server),ȱ theȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱdisplaysȱtheȱqueueȱandȱstatusȱforȱallȱjobsȱsentȱtoȱ theȱ3Dȱprinterȱbyȱtheȱserverȱitselfȱandȱbyȱallȱclientȱcomputersȱonȱtheȱ network.ȱAllȱjobsȱdisplayedȱcanȱbeȱeditedȱandȱmanipulated.ȱ • InȱObjetȱStudioȱinstalledȱonȱclientȱcomputers,ȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱ displaysȱtheȱqueueȱandȱstatusȱonlyȱforȱjobsȱsentȱtoȱaȱ3Dȱprinterȱserverȱ fromȱthatȱcomputer.ȱOnlyȱtheseȱjobsȱcanȱbeȱeditedȱandȱmanipulatedȱ fromȱtheȱclientȱcomputer. Client computers can be connected, via the local network, to different Objet 3D printers, but only to one at a time. The Job Manager screen displays the status of the 3D printer to which the client is currently connected. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 3–9 I ntroducing the Stratasys P750K 3D Printing System 3–10 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) I nstalling Objet Software HowȱtoȱInstallȱSoftwareȱforȱtheȱStratasysȱ3D Printing System..................... 2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 4–1 I nstalling Objet Software How to I nstall Software for the Stratasys 3D Printing System TheȱObjetȱStudioȱsetupȱwizardȱguidesȱyouȱwhenȱinstallingȱthisȱsoftware.ȱ ObjetȱStudioȱisȱinstalledȱonȱtheȱprinterȬserverȱ(“host”)ȱcomputer,ȱbutȱitȱcanȱ alsoȱbeȱinstalledȱonȱremote,ȱ“client”ȱcomputersȱandȱonȱcomputersȱusedȱtoȱ prepareȱfilesȱforȱprintingȱmodels,ȱorȱforȱtrainingȱandȱdemonstrationȱ purposes.ȱDuringȱinstallation,ȱyouȱchooseȱtoȱinstallȱeitherȱtheȱprinterȬserverȱ (“host”)ȱapplicationȱorȱtheȱclientȱapplication.ȱ To install Objet software: 1. InsertȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCDȱintoȱtheȱdiskȱdrive. 2. RightȬclickȱtheȱStartȱbuttonȱandȱselectȱExploreȱ(orȱuseȱanyȱotherȱmethodȱ forȱdisplayingȱfilesȱonȱtheȱcomputer). 3. OpenȱtheȱCDȬdriveȱfolderȱandȱselectȱSetup. 4. IfȱyouȱareȱinstallingȱanȱObjetȱStudioȱupgrade,ȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱyourȱ printerȱisȱcompatibleȱwithȱitȱbyȱcheckingȱtheȱlistȱdisplayed. Figure 4-1:Objet Studio compatibility check 5. ToȱinstallȱObjetȱStudio,ȱyouȱmustȱagreeȱtoȱtheȱlicenseȱagreement.ȱAfterȱ readingȱitsȱterms,ȱclickȱYesȱtoȱcontinue,ȱorȱNoȱtoȱcloseȱtheȱwizard. 4–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide IfȱyouȱclickȱYes,ȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱshouldȱappear.ȱ Figure 4-2: Objet Studio installation wizard—Welcome screen 6. ClickȱNextȱtoȱbeginȱinstallation. 7. InȱtheȱSelectȱFeaturesȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱrequiredȱinstallationȱoption. SelectȱObjet Studio for a server computer... • ifȱyouȱareȱinstallingȱObjetȱStudioȱonȱtheȱserverȱ(“host”)ȱcomputer— theȱcomputerȱdirectlyȱconnectedȱtoȱanȱStratasysȱprinter. • ifȱyouȱareȱinstallingȱObjetȱStudioȱonȱaȱstandaloneȱ(offȬline)ȱ computer. SelectȱObjet Studio for client workstations ifȱyouȱareȱinstallingȱObjetȱ Studioȱonȱaȱ“client”ȱworkstation—aȱremoteȱcomputerȱthatȱpreparesȱ printȱjobsȱandȱthenȱsendsȱthemȱtoȱaȱserverȱcomputer. Figure 4-3: Objet Studio configuration selection DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 4–3 I nstalling Objet Software 8. InȱtheȱSelectȱInstallationȱFolderȱscreen,ȱverifyȱtheȱdestinationȱfolderȱandȱ clickȱNext.ȱ It is recommended that you do not change the default destination folder. Click Disk Space to check the space in the destination folder. Figure 4-4: Objet Studio installation-folder selection 9. InȱtheȱConfirmȱInstallationȱscreen,ȱclickȱNext toȱbeginȱinstallation.ȱ 10. InȱtheȱSelectȱPrinterȱTypeȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱObjetȱ3Dȱprinterȱusedȱforȱ producingȱmodelsȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 4-5: Printer selection 4–4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Installationȱbeginsȱandȱaȱprogressȱbarȱappears,ȱshowingȱtheȱprogressȱofȱ theȱinstallationȱprocess. Figure 4-6: Installation progress bar WhenȱtheȱObjetȱprogramȱinstallationȱisȱcomplete,ȱtheȱfinalȱInstallShieldȱ wizardȱscreenȱappears. Figure 4-7: Final installation screen 11. Restartȱtheȱcomputerȱtoȱcompleteȱtheȱsoftwareȱinstallation. Note: If you installed the software from a CD or DVD, make sure to remove it from the disk drive before restarting the computer. Theȱinstallationȱprocessȱendsȱwhenȱtheȱappropriateȱicon(s)ȱappearȱonȱtheȱ computerȱdesktop:ȱ • ObjetȱStudio • StopȱJobȱManagerȱ(forȱserversȱandȱstandaloneȱstations) DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 4–5 I nstalling Objet Software How to Uninstall Objet Studio IfȱthereȱisȱeverȱaȱneedȱtoȱuninstallȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱsoftware,ȱdoȱnotȱattemptȱ toȱdoȱsoȱfromȱtheȱWindowsȱControlȱPanel.ȱ(Thisȱdoesȱnotȱcompletelyȱ removeȱallȱsoftwareȱcomponents.)ȱInstead— ¾ FromȱtheȱStartȱmenu,ȱselectȱAll Programs > Objet Studio > Uninstall Objet Studio. 4–6 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Using Objet Studio LaunchingȱObjetȱStudio...................................................................... 3 Windows®ȱ7ȱSecurityȱWarning........................................................... 3 ObjetȱStudioȱInterface ........................................................................... 4 RibbonȱCommands ............................................................................... 6 ObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱMenu .......................................................... 8 ModelȱTreeȱPane .................................................................................... 8 PreparingȱModelsȱforȱProduction ..................................................... 9 OBJDFȱFiles:ȱOverview......................................................................... 9 Model Files ............................................................................................. 9 PlacingȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱBuildȱTray..................................................... 10 OpeningȱObjetȱTrayȱFiles ................................................................... 14 QuickȬAccessȱModelȱCommands...................................................... 16 CopyingȱandȱPastingȱObjects ............................................................ 17 SelectingȱObjects.................................................................................. 18 SplittingȱObjectsȱintoȱComponents................................................... 19 ModelȬMaterialȱSettings..................................................................... 20 ChangingȱtheȱModelȱMaterial ........................................................... 21 AssigningȱaȱModelȱMaterialȱtoȱObjects............................................ 22 SurfaceȱFinish....................................................................................... 23 CoatingȱObjects.................................................................................... 23 AssigningȱPropertiesȱtoȱHiddenȱObjects ......................................... 24 PositioningȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱBuildȱTray ............................................ 25 AutomaticȱOrientation ....................................................................... 25 AutomaticȱPlacement ......................................................................... 26 ManualȱPositioning............................................................................. 26 ModelȱOrientation............................................................................. 26 ManipulatingȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱBuildȱTray........................................ 27 PositioningȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱZȬAxis .................................................... 27 ValidȱObjectȱPlacement....................................................................... 28 UsingȱaȱGridȱtoȱPositionȱObjects ....................................................... 30 MeasurementȱUnits............................................................................. 31 SettingȱModelȱDimensions................................................................. 32 RepositioningȱObjects......................................................................... 32 ChangingȱanȱObject’sȱOrientation..................................................... 34 GroupingȱandȱUngroupingȱObjects.................................................. 36 FreezingȱModelȱOrientation .............................................................. 37 DisplayȱOptions................................................................................. 37 ViewingȱObjects................................................................................... 37 ScreenȱLayout ...................................................................................... 39 TrayȱPerspective .................................................................................. 39 SettingȱObjectȱColors .......................................................................... 41 LoadingȱLargeȱFiles ............................................................................ 41 LargeȱFileȱManipulation..................................................................... 42 ZoomȱOptions...................................................................................... 44 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–1 HandlingȱCompletedȱTrays ............................................................. 45 TrayȱValidation .................................................................................... 45 ProductionȱEstimates.......................................................................... 46 PrintingȱModes .................................................................................... 47 EȬmailingȱObjetȱDigitalȱFiles ............................................................. 48 PrintingȱtheȱTrayȱFile .......................................................................... 48 ApplyingȱAdditionalȱObjetȱStudioȱFeatures ................................. 51 DividingȱObjects.................................................................................. 51 ChoosingȱtheȱSupportȱStrength......................................................... 52 “Hollow”—ȱFillingȱModelsȱwithȱSupportȱMaterial ....................... 53 DisplayingȱtheȱCrossȱSectionȱofȱObjects .......................................... 54 SavingȱtheȱScreenȱDisplayȱasȱanȱImage File .................................... 55 ExportingȱandȱImportingȱObjetȱBuildȱTrays ................................... 56 CustomizingȱObjetȱStudio................................................................ 57 CreatingȱaȱQuickȱAccessȱToolbar ...................................................... 57 HidingȱtheȱRibbon............................................................................... 58 DisplayȱColors ..................................................................................... 59 KeyboardȱShortcuts ............................................................................ 60 SettingȱUserȱPreferences..................................................................... 61 ProfessionalȱModeȱFeatures............................................................. 62 DefaultȱSettings ................................................................................... 63 OpenGLȱDriverȱConfiguration.......................................................... 64 GettingȱAdditionalȱObjetȱStudioȱAssistance ................................. 66 ObjetȱStudioȱVersion,ȱMaterialȱModuleȱandȱLicensedȱFeatures. 66 MonitoringȱandȱManagingȱPrintȱJobs ............................................ 68 JobȱManagerȱScreen ............................................................................ 68 SettingȱtheȱPrinterȱConnection .......................................................... 70 OffȬlineȱMode....................................................................................... 71 SettingȱtheȱRemoteȱPrinterȱConnectionȱ(ClientȱMode).................. 73 JobȱManagerȱCommands ................................................................... 73 ConfiguringȱUserȱAlerts..................................................................... 76 PrintingȱtheȱTray.................................................................................. 77 AdditionalȱServerȱFeatures ................................................................ 77 5–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Launching Objet Studio AfterȱyouȱinstallȱObjetȱStudio,ȱaȱlaunchȱiconȱ ȱappearsȱonȱtheȱ Windowsȱdesktop.ȱOpenȱtheȱapplicationȱbyȱdoubleȬclickingȱthisȱicon,ȱorȱbyȱ selectingȱObjetȱStudioȱfromȱtheȱStartȱmenu. Windows® 7 Security Warning DependingȱonȱtheȱUserȱAccountȱControlȱsettingsȱinȱWindows®ȱ7,ȱyouȱ mightȱseeȱtheȱfollowingȱwarningȱwhenȱopeningȱObjetȱStudio. Figure 5-1: Security Warning IfȱyouȱclickȱYes,ȱObjetȱStudioȱopens.ȱHowever,ȱthisȱwarningȱmessageȱwillȱ appearȱeachȱtimeȱyouȱopenȱtheȱprogram,ȱunlessȱyouȱchangeȱtheȱUserȱ AccountȱControlȱsettings. To prevent the warning message from appearing again: 1. Clickȱtheȱlinkȱatȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱsecurityȱwarningȱdialogȱboxȱ(Change when these notifications appear). 2. InȱtheȱUserȱAccountȱControlȱSettingsȱscreen,ȱmoveȱtheȱsliderȱtoȱ“Neverȱ notify.” Figure 5-2: Changing the User Account Control settings 3. ClickȱOK. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–3 Using Objet Studio 4. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱdialogȱbox,ȱclickȱYes. Figure 5-3: Confirming the change in the User Account Control settings Objet Studio I nterface WhenȱObjetȱStudioȱopens,ȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱscreenȱappears,ȱshowingȱanȱ emptyȱbuildȱtray.ȱ Figure 5-4: Objet Studio opening screen TheȱObjetȱStudioȱinterfaceȱconsistsȱofȱtwoȱmainȱscreens: • TrayȱSettings—forȱarrangingȱmodelsȱandȱpreparingȱthemȱforȱprinting. • JobȱManager—forȱmonitoringȱandȱmanagingȱprintȱjobs. Thisȱscreenȱisȱdescribedȱinȱ“MonitoringȱandȱManagingȱPrintȱJobs”ȱonȱ page 68. Eachȱscreenȱisȱcontrolledȱbyȱmenusȱandȱiconsȱonȱitsȱownȱribbon.ȱAnȱ additionalȱribbon,ȱModelȱSettings,ȱdisplaysȱcontrolsȱforȱconfiguringȱandȱ manipulatingȱselectedȱmodels. ObjetȱStudioȱanticipatesȱyourȱworkflowȱbyȱdisplayingȱandȱenablingȱtheȱ optionsȱrelevantȱtoȱyourȱcurrentȱtask.ȱForȱexample,ȱwhenȱyouȱfirstȱopenȱ ObjetȱStudio,ȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbonȱisȱdisabledȱuntilȱyouȱplaceȱaȱmodelȱ onȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱSimilarly,ȱoptionsȱavailableȱfromȱtheȱstandardȱtoolbarȱ menusȱareȱenabledȱorȱdisabledȱtoȱmatchȱtheȱcurrentȱworkflow. 5–4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Theȱribbon,ȱcolorsȱused,ȱandȱseveralȱotherȱinterfaceȱfeaturesȱcanȱbeȱ customized.ȱHowȱtoȱchangeȱtheȱappearanceȱofȱtheȱinterfaceȱisȱexplainedȱinȱ “CustomizingȱObjetȱStudio”ȱonȱpage 57. Instructions for using the commands for preparing models for production and sending jobs to the printer, appear later in this chapter. Figure 5-5: Tray Settings ribbon Figure 5-6: Model Settings ribbon DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–5 Using Objet Studio Ribbon Commands Group TheȱfollowingȱtableȱlistsȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱandȱModelȱSettingsȱribbonȱ commandȱgroups,ȱandȱshowsȱwhenȱtheyȱareȱenabled,ȱandȱwhereȱtheyȱ appear.ȱ Purpose When enabled Settingȱdisplayȱ colors. Always. Tray Settings Ribbon Model Settings Ribbon Modelsȱareȱonȱ Selectingȱ perspectiveȱandȱ theȱbuildȱtray. zoomȱlevel. Chooseȱtoȱselectȱ Modelsȱareȱonȱ theȱbuildȱtray. aȱplane,ȱ elements,ȱorȱ elementȱgroupsȱ (assemblies). Changeȱtheȱ perspectiveȱofȱ theȱactiveȱpane. Assigningȱ printingȱ material(s). Modelsȱareȱonȱ theȱbuildȱtray. • Buildȱtrayȱ isȱempty. • Modelsȱareȱ notȱ selected. 5–6 Undoingȱorȱ redoingȱactions. Afterȱanȱ actionȱorȱ objectȱ selection. Openingȱandȱ savingȱfiles. Modelsȱareȱ notȱselected. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Group Purpose When enabled Tray Settings Ribbon Model Settings Ribbon Placingȱmodelȱ Always. filesȱonȱtheȱbuildȱ tray. PreȬbuild/buildȱ commands. Modelsȱareȱonȱ theȱbuildȱtray. Settingȱmodelȱ dimensions. Aȱmodelȱisȱ selected. ȱ Aȱmodelȱisȱ Cutting,ȱ copying,ȱpastingȱ selected. andȱdeletingȱ models. Moving,ȱrotatingȱ Aȱmodelȱisȱ selected. andȱresizingȱ models. • Assigningȱaȱ • materialȱtoȱaȱ modelȱorȱ shell. Separatingȱaȱ modelȱintoȱ shells. Aȱmodelȱisȱ selected. Assigningȱmodelȱ Aȱmodelȱisȱ selected. finishȱandȱ settingȱsupportȱ strength/ “hollow.” Settingȱaȱmodel’sȱ Aȱmodelȱisȱ unitȱofȱmeasureȱ selected. (millimetersȱorȱ inches). To quickly identify an icon, move the cursor over it to display a tooltip. The “Undo” and “Redo” tooltips change to reflect your last Objet Studio action. After activating some of the ribbon commands (by clicking them), they remain active until you click another button or until you press the Escape key. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–7 Using Objet Studio Objet Studio Commands Menu Clickingȱtheȱ ȱiconȱinȱtheȱupperȬleftȱcornerȱopensȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱ Commandsȱmenu.ȱThisȱmenuȱdisplaysȱbasicȱapplicationȱcommandsȱandȱ options. Figure 5-7: Objet Studio Commands menu TheȱOptions buttonȱopensȱaȱdialogȱboxȱforȱcustomizingȱObjetȱStudio. Figure 5-8: Options dialog box Model Tree Pane 5–8 TheȱModelȱTreeȱpaneȱlistsȱtheȱobjectsȱplacedȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱinȱaȱparentȬ childȱhierarchy.ȱByȱdefault,ȱtheȱpaneȱ“floats”—ȱthatȱis,ȱyouȱcanȱmoveȱitȱtoȱ anotherȱpositionȱonȱtheȱscreenȱandȱresizeȱit.ȱAlternatively,ȱyouȱcanȱfixȱitsȱ positionȱatȱtheȱleftȱofȱtheȱapplicationȱwindow,ȱandȱevenȱhideȱit. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Preparing Models for Production Modelȱpreparationȱinvolvesȱtheȱfollowingȱbasicȱsteps: 1. Placeȱobjectsȱorȱassembliesȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. 2. Ifȱnecessary,ȱmanipulateȱtheȱobject’sȱorientationȱandȱposition. 3. Selectȱtheȱmaterialsȱandȱmodelȱfinish. JustȱasȱStratasysȱprintersȱcanȱproduceȱdifferentȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱ usingȱdifferentȱmaterials,ȱyouȱcanȱproduceȱcomponentsȱofȱaȱmodelȱwithȱ differentȱmaterials.ȱToȱdoȱthis,ȱeachȱpartȱofȱtheȱmodelȱmustȱbeȱaȱseparateȱstlȱ file.ȱIfȱtheȱmodel’sȱcomponentȱpartsȱwereȱnotȱsavedȱinȱtheȱCADȱsoftwareȱasȱ separateȱstlȱfiles,ȱyouȱcanȱuseȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱseparateȱtheȱmodelȱintoȱ componentȱparts.ȱ(Thisȱisȱdescribedȱinȱ“SplittingȱObjectsȱintoȱComponents”ȱ onȱpage 19ȱandȱinȱ“DividingȱObjects”ȱonȱpage 51.) OBJDF Files: Overview Anȱobjdfȱfileȱdescribesȱbothȱtheȱgeometryȱofȱaȱsingleȱobjectȱandȱtheȱ materials,ȱandȱfinishȱrequiredȱtoȱprintȱit.ȱTheȱobjdfȱfileȱcanȱrepresentȱanȱ objectȱthatȱisȱaȱsingleȱstlȱfile,ȱorȱanȱobjectȱassembledȱfromȱcomponentȱstlȱ files.ȱ ObjetȱStudioȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱsplitȱanȱstlȱfileȱrepresentingȱaȱcomplexȱobjectȱ intoȱanȱassemblyȱofȱcomponentȱstlȱfiles,ȱandȱsaveȱtheȱassemblyȱasȱanȱobjdfȱ file.ȱEachȱpartȱ(stlȱfile)ȱdescribedȱbyȱtheȱobjdfȱfileȱcanȱhaveȱitsȱownȱmodelȬ materialȱcharacteristic,ȱsoȱthatȱtheȱStratasysȱprinterȱproducesȱtheȱ componentȱpartsȱfromȱspecificȱmaterials.ȱ Anotherȱuseȱforȱobjdfȱfilesȱisȱforȱsavingȱaȱgroupȱofȱseparateȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtrayȱasȱoneȱunit,ȱtogetherȱwithȱtheirȱrelativeȱpositionsȱandȱmaterials.ȱ Thisȱisȱespeciallyȱusefulȱforȱproducingȱmodelsȱinȱtheȱfutureȱwithȱtheȱsameȱ materials.ȱInȱfact,ȱwhenȱyouȱsaveȱobjdfȱfiles,ȱyouȱspecifyȱmaterialsȱforȱ printingȱmodelsȱwithoutȱregardȱtoȱtheȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱloadedȱinȱtheȱ printer.ȱTheȱsameȱobjectȱcanȱlaterȱbeȱplacedȱonȱbuildȱtraysȱforȱprinting.ȱEachȱ timeȱyouȱsendȱaȱbuildȱtrayȱtoȱtheȱprinter,ȱyouȱdecideȱwhetherȱtoȱallowȱ printingȱwithȱsubstituteȱmaterialsȱorȱonlyȱwithȱtheȱmaterialsȱspecified. TheȱConnexȱversionȱofȱObjetȱStudioȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱdisplay,ȱmanipulateȱandȱ printȱcomponentȱpartsȱofȱaȱmodelȱassemblyȱthatȱwasȱsavedȱasȱanȱobjdfȱfile,ȱ sinceȱeachȱcomponentȱisȱaȱseparateȱstlȱfile.ȱThisȱcanȱbeȱusefulȱforȱprintingȱ onlyȱspecificȱpartsȱofȱaȱmodel. Furtherȱexplanationsȱofȱobjdfȱfiles,ȱandȱtheirȱfeatures,ȱappearȱthroughoutȱ thisȱchapter. Model Files Toȱproduceȱmodels,ȱyouȱopenȱoneȱorȱmoreȱmodelȱfilesȱinȱObjetȱStudioȱandȱ positionȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱYouȱcanȱplaceȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱinȱ severalȱways: • byȱinsertingȱindividual stl or slc filesȱ(orȱanȱassemblyȱofȱstlȱfiles). • byȱinserting anȱobjdfȱfileȱ(anȱassembly). • byȱpastingȱobjectsȱthatȱyouȱcopiedȱtoȱtheȱWindowsȱclipboard. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–9 Using Objet Studio Placing Objects on the Build Tray To place an object on the build tray: 1. OpenȱtheȱInsertȱdialogȱbox— • FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱInsert. or— • OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱclickȱ or— • RightȬclickȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱandȱselectȱInsert fromȱtheȱcontextȱ menu. TheȱInsertȱdialogȱboxȱappears. Figure 5-9: Insert dialog box 2. InȱtheȱLookȱinȱfield,ȱdisplayȱtheȱappropriateȱfolder. 3. InȱtheȱFilesȱofȱtypeȱfield,ȱselectȱtheȱfileȱtypeȱtoȱdisplay. 4. Selectȱtheȱdesiredȱfile,ȱandȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱitȱappearsȱinȱtheȱFileȱnameȱ field. IfȱtheȱPreviewȱcheckȱboxȱisȱselected,ȱtheȱobjectȱisȱdisplayedȱinȱtheȱdialogȱ box,ȱasȱshownȱinȱfigure 5Ȭ9. Youȱcanȱopenȱseveralȱstlȱfilesȱtoȱplaceȱseveralȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱ Ifȱyouȱselectȱmultipleȱstlȱfilesȱthatȱmakeȱupȱanȱassembly,ȱyouȱcanȱselectȱ allȱorȱsomeȱofȱtheȱparts.ȱToȱprintȱtheȱentireȱmodel,ȱselectȱallȱofȱanȱ assembly’sȱcomponentȱstlȱfiles,ȱandȱselectȱtheȱAssemblyȱcheckȱbox.ȱThisȱ positionsȱtheȱpartsȱasȱaȱcomplete,ȱintegratedȱmodelȱinsteadȱofȱasȱ independentȱparts.ȱTheȱeffectsȱofȱselectingȱtheȱAssemblyȱcheckȱbox—inȱ bothȱtheȱmodelȱtreeȱandȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱdisplay—areȱshownȱinȱtheȱ followingȱfigures. 5–10 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Figure 5-10: Assembly check box selected—stl files are placed as an assembly Figure 5-11: Assembly check box not selected—stl files are placed as parts TheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbonȱisȱdisplayedȱwhenȱobjectsȱareȱplacedȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtray. 5. Selectȱanyȱofȱtheȱfollowingȱoptions,ȱasȱrequired: • Units—Millimetersȱorȱinchesȱforȱtheȱobject’sȱunitsȱofȱmeasure. Theȱ3Dȱfileȱcontainsȱtheȱobjectȇsȱproportions,ȱbutȱnotȱitsȱunitsȱofȱ measure.ȱTherefore,ȱmakeȱsureȱtoȱcorrectlyȱselectȱeitherȱmillimetersȱ orȱinchesȱwhenȱinsertingȱanȱobject.ȱOtherwise,ȱtheȱsizeȱofȱtheȱobjectȱ onȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱwillȱbeȱeitherȱmuchȱtooȱlargeȱorȱmuchȱtooȱsmall.ȱToȱ changeȱtheȱmeasurementȱunitsȱofȱobjectsȱalreadyȱplacedȱonȱtheȱtray,ȱ seeȱ“MeasurementȱUnits”ȱonȱpage 31. • Number of copies—Howȱmanyȱcopiesȱofȱthisȱobjectȱtoȱplaceȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtray. • Orient Automatically—Automaticallyȱorientȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱ forȱefficientȱmodelȱbuilding. • Assembly—Markȱthisȱcheckȱboxȱifȱyouȱselectedȱmultipleȱstlȱfilesȱthatȱ areȱpartȱofȱanȱassembly. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–11 Using Objet Studio Note: The Extents values displayed in the Coordinates section of the Insert dialog box, represent the maximum dimensions of the object on each axis. These dimensions correspond to the virtual “bounding box” surrounding the object see figure 5-50 on page 38). 6. ClickȱInsert. ObjetȱStudioȱplacesȱtheȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱandȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtree. Model Tree pane Model Toolbar Figure 5-12: Default screen layout TheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbonȱisȱdisplayedȱwhenȱobjectsȱareȱplacedȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtray. Ifȱtheȱobjectȱisȱoverȱaȱcertainȱsize,ȱtheȱLoadingȱPlacedȱElementsȱdialogȱboxȱ appears. ȱ Figure 5-13: Loading Placed Elements dialog box You can speed up the opening of large files by changing the Large Files settings—see “Loading Large Files” on page 41). 5–12 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide OpeningȱobjdfȱFiles Beforeȱplacingȱobjdfȱfilesȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱObjetȱStudioȱmustȱextractȱtheȱ componentȱstlȱfilesȱtogetherȱwithȱinformationȱaboutȱtheirȱrelativeȱpositionȱ andȱmodelȱmaterials.ȱToȱdoȱthis,ȱObjetȱStudioȱcreatesȱaȱfolderȱwithȱtheȱsameȱ nameȱasȱtheȱobjdfȱfile,ȱinȱtheȱsameȱlocation. Figure 5-14: Insert dialog box (objdf file) DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–13 Using Objet Studio Opening Objet Tray Files Youȱcanȱopenȱtraysȱthatȱwereȱsavedȱasȱobjtfȱfiles.ȱThisȱisȱuseful,ȱforȱexample,ȱ ifȱyouȱsavedȱaȱtrayȱafterȱpreparingȱitȱforȱprinting,ȱandȱnowȱyouȱwantȱtoȱ makeȱchangesȱbeforeȱprintingȱit.ȱ To place an object saved as an Objet Tray File (objtf) file on the build tray: 1. FromȱtheȱFileȱgroup,ȱclickȱ or— FromȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱselectȱOpen. TheȱOpenȱdialogȱboxȱisȱdisplayed. Figure 5-15: Objet Tray File Open dialog box 2. Selectȱtheȱdesiredȱfile,ȱandȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱitȱappearsȱinȱtheȱFileȱnameȱ field.ȱ IfȱtheȱPreviewȱcheckȱboxȱisȱselected,ȱtheȱobjectȱisȱdisplayed. 3. ClickȱOpen. ObjetȱStudioȱopensȱtheȱtrayȱfile. The objtf file is actually a file containing instructions for printing—which stl files to print and their position on the build tray. Because the objtf file references the stl files used, they must remain in the same file location as when the objtf file was saved. 5–14 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide STL file loading preference Ifȱthereȱareȱidenticallyȱnamedȱstlȱfilesȱinȱmoreȱthanȱoneȱlocation,ȱyouȱneedȱ toȱensureȱthatȱtheȱcorrectȱcomponentȱstlȱfilesȱareȱlinkedȱtoȱtheȱobjtfȱfile.ȱForȱ example,ȱifȱthereȱareȱidenticallyȱnamedȱstlȱfilesȱonȱoneȱdriveȱandȱonȱaȱflashȱ driveȱ(thisȱcanȱoccurȱifȱyouȱcopyȱtheȱoriginalȱfilesȱtoȱaȱworkingȱfolder),ȱyouȱ canȱsetȱtheȱdefaultȱlocationȱfromȱwhichȱfilesȱareȱloaded. To set the Load Order: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions. or— InȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱclickȱOptions. 2. InȱtheȱOptionsȱdialogȱbox,ȱdisplayȱtheȱSettingsȱtab. Figure 5-16: Options dialog box, Settings tab 3. UnderȱLoadȱSearchȱOrder,ȱselectȱanȱoption: • Local—toȱloadȱfilesȱfromȱtheȱlocationȱwhereȱtheyȱwereȱlastȱsaved. • Original—toȱloadȱfilesȱinȱtheirȱoriginalȱlocation. 4. ClickȱOK. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–15 Using Objet Studio Quick-Access Model Commands Model Toolbar Youȱcanȱaccessȱcommonȱcommandsȱforȱworkingȱwithȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱ trayȱwithȱtheȱconvenientȱModelȱToolbarȱandȱcontextȱmenus. SelectȱanȱobjectȱinȱtheȱtrayȱtoȱdisplayȱtheȱModelȱToolbarȱthatȱcontainsȱiconsȱ toȱperformȱcommonȱtasks. Figure 5-17: Model Toolbar TheȱtableȱbelowȱdescribesȱtheȱModelȱToolbarȱicons. Icon Description Appliesȱaȱmatteȱfinishȱtoȱtheȱmodel. Appliesȱaȱglossyȱfinishȱtoȱtheȱmodel. OpensȱtheȱAdvancedȱPropertiesȱdialogȱboxȱforȱsettingȱtheȱ GridȱStyleȱandȱtheȱHollowȱoption. Enablesȱdraggingȱanȱobjectȱ(seeȱpage 5Ȭ32). OpensȱtheȱTransformȱdialogȱboxȱforȱchangingȱtheȱ object’sȱpositionȱandȱscale. TogglesȱtheȱLockȱModelȱOrientationȱsetting. Allowsȱyouȱtoȱchooseȱtheȱprintingȱmaterials. Enablesȱyouȱtoȱapplyȱaȱcoatingȱtoȱtheȱmodel,ȱorȱchangeȱ theȱcoatingȱpreviouslyȱapplied. Right-click model menu IfȱyouȱrightȬclickȱonȱanȱobject,ȱaȱpopȬupȱcontextȱmenuȱisȱdisplayedȱfromȱ whichȱyouȱcanȱalsoȱselectȱtheȱmodelȱfinish,ȱchangeȱitsȱpositionȱandȱscale,ȱ andȱsetȱtheȱGridȱStyleȱandȱHollowȱoptions. You can also create a Quick Access toolbar with your most commonly used icons grouped together. See “Creating a Quick Access Toolbar” on page 57. 5–16 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Copying and Pasting Objects Ifȱyouȱneedȱtoȱduplicateȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱyouȱcanȱinsertȱtheȱsameȱ objectȱfromȱitsȱfileȱmoreȱthanȱonce.ȱAnȱeasierȱway,ȱhowever,ȱisȱtoȱcopyȱandȱ pasteȱtheȱobject.ȱYouȱcanȱcopyȱobjectsȱfromȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱorȱtheȱmodelȱ tree—individualȱorȱmultipleȱpartsȱorȱassemblies.ȱTheȱobjectsȱcopiedȱremainȱ inȱtheȱWindowsȱclipboardȱuntilȱyouȱpasteȱthemȱontoȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱ Youȱcanȱalsoȱcopyȱobjectsȱfromȱoneȱtrayȱandȱpasteȱthemȱontoȱanother,ȱinȱtheȱ sameȱwayȱasȱyouȱcopyȱtextȱfromȱoneȱdocumentȱandȱpasteȱitȱintoȱanotherȱ one.ȱHowever,ȱObjetȱStudioȱallowsȱonlyȱoneȱtrayȱtoȱbeȱopenȱatȱaȱtime.ȱForȱ eachȱbuildȱtrayȱyouȱneedȱtoȱworkȱwithȱ(atȱtheȱsameȱtime),ȱyouȱmustȱopenȱaȱ separateȱObjetȱStudioȱwindow,ȱbyȱrunningȱtheȱapplicationȱagainȱ(fromȱtheȱ WindowsȱStartȱmenu). Having multiple Objet Studio windows open can be convenient when you need to manipulate or configure objects before inserting them in your production build tray. For example, if you need to change the model material of an object (saved as an objdf file) to match the model material already used in the production build tray, you must do so before inserting the object—on another tray. Copying and pasting also allows you to use objects already configured on previously-used build trays for newer projects. YouȱperformȱtheȱCopyȱandȱPasteȱcommandsȱasȱinȱotherȱWindowsȱ applications: • fromȱtheȱrightȬclickȱcontextȱmenu. • byȱusingȱkeyboardȱshortcutsȱ(Ctrl+CȱandȱCtrl+V,ȱrespectively). TheȱPasteȱSpecialȱcommandȱ(fromȱtheȱobject’sȱrightȬclickȱcontextȱmenu)ȱ enablesȱyouȱtoȱplaceȱduplicateȱobjectsȱevenȱmoreȱefficiently: • Youȱcanȱspecifyȱtheȱnumberȱofȱduplicatesȱtoȱplaceȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱatȱ once. • Youȱcanȱsetȱtheȱdistance,ȱonȱeachȱaxis,ȱbetweenȱtheȱduplicateȱobjects. • Youȱcanȱmanipulateȱmirrorȱimagesȱofȱtheȱoriginalȱobject,ȱandȱflipȱthemȱ onȱselectedȱaxes. Figure 5-18: Paste Special dialog box DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–17 Using Objet Studio Selecting Objects Toȱmanipulateȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱorȱassignȱcharacteristicsȱtoȱitȱ (modelȱmaterial,ȱbuildingȱstyleȱetc.),ȱyouȱmustȱfirstȱselectȱtheȱobject.ȱYouȱ selectȱanȱobjectȱbyȱclickingȱit,ȱeitherȱonȱtheȱtrayȱorȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtree.ȱItsȱ imageȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱchangesȱcolorȱ(toȱlightȱblue,ȱbyȱdefault)ȱandȱitsȱ nameȱisȱhighlightedȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtree.ȱYouȱcanȱselectȱmultipleȱobjectsȱbyȱ drawingȱaȱboxȱaroundȱthemȱwithȱtheȱmouseȱcursor,ȱorȱbyȱpressingȱtheȱCtrlȱ orȱShiftȱkeysȱwhileȱclickingȱadditionalȱobjects. Alternatively,ȱselectȱorȱdeȬselectȱobjectsȱusingȱtheȱfollowingȱEditȱmenuȱ commands: • Select All • Invert Selection • Undo Select object Figure 5-19: Edit menu Sometimes,ȱyouȱneedȱtoȱselectȱindividualȱelementsȱofȱanȱassembly.ȱOtherȱ times,ȱyouȱneedȱtoȱselectȱtheȱentireȱassembly.ȱTheȱSelectionȱiconȱdisplayedȱ onȱtheȱribbonȱdeterminesȱwhatȱwillȱbeȱselectedȱwhenȱyouȱclickȱonȱtheȱ model: ȱorȱ To change the selection action: 1. OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱorȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon— a. ClickȱtheȱSelectionȱicon:ȱ ȱorȱ b. Onȱtheȱflyoutȱtoolbar,ȱclickȱtheȱappropriateȱicon: Select Element Select Group Figure 5-20: Selection flyout toolbar 5–18 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Splitting Objects into Components Youȱcanȱconvertȱaȱcomplexȱobjectȱtoȱanȱassemblyȱofȱcomponentȱparts.ȱToȱdoȱ so,ȱyouȱsplitȱtheȱstlȱfileȱthatȱrepresentsȱtheȱobjectȱintoȱaȱgroupȱofȱseparateȱstlȱ files,ȱeachȱoneȱrepresentingȱaȱcomponent.ȱ(ThisȱisȱreferredȱtoȱinȱtheȱObjetȱ Studioȱinterfaceȱasȱseparatingȱtheȱobjectȱintoȱshells.)ȱYouȱcanȱthenȱassignȱaȱ modelȱmaterialȱtoȱeachȱstlȱfile,ȱandȱyouȱcanȱsaveȱtheȱnewlyȬcreatedȱ assemblyȱasȱanȱobjdfȱfile. To split an object into an assembly of component parts: 1. Ifȱtheȱobjectȱisȱnotȱdisplayed,ȱplaceȱitȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱbyȱinsertingȱitsȱstlȱ fileȱ(seeȱ“PlacingȱObjectsȱonȱtheȱBuildȱTray”ȱonȱpage 10). Theȱobjectȱappears—onȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱandȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtreeȱpane—asȱaȱ singleȱpart.ȱItȱisȱassigned,ȱbyȱdefault,ȱtheȱ“primary”ȱmodelȱmaterial.ȱ(Ifȱ ObjetȱStudioȱisȱconfiguredȱwithȱaȱsecondaryȱmaterial,ȱyouȱcanȱassignȱ it—orȱaȱdigitalȱmaterial—toȱtheȱentireȱobject.ȱThisȱisȱexplainedȱinȱ “ModelȬMaterialȱSettings”ȱonȱpage 20.) Figure 5-21: Object placed on the build tray from a single stl file Note: There is no need to resize or arrange the object on the build tray at this time. 2. Withȱtheȱobjectȱselected: • FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱSeparate into Shells. or— • Onȱtheȱribbon,ȱclickȱ Aȱdialogȱboxȱopensȱinȱwhichȱyouȱcanȱspecifyȱwhereȱtoȱsaveȱtheȱ componentȱstlȱfiles.ȱ(Byȱdefault,ȱObjetȱStudioȱoffersȱtoȱsaveȱtheȱnewȱfilesȱ inȱaȱfolderȱinȱtheȱsameȱlocationȱasȱtheȱoriginalȱstlȱfile.) Figure 5-22: Folder selection for saving stl files after splitting into shells 3. ClickȱOK. ObjetȱStudioȱsplitsȱtheȱobjectȱintoȱanȱassemblyȱofȱcomponentȱparts,ȱeachȱ aȱseparateȱstlȱfileȱ(“shell”). DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–19 Using Objet Studio Theȱobjectȱappears—onȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱandȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtree—asȱanȱ assemblyȱofȱpartsȱ(“shells”).ȱYouȱcanȱassignȱeachȱpartȱaȱdifferentȱmodelȱ materialȱ(Thisȱisȱexplainedȱinȱ“ModelȬMaterialȱSettings”ȱonȱpage 20).ȱ Figure 5-23: Object after being converted to an assembly of component parts Model-Material Settings BeforeȱplacingȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱinȱObjetȱStudio,ȱyouȱshouldȱpayȱ attentionȱtoȱtheȱmaterialȱselectionȱsettingsȱonȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon. Figure 5-24: Material selection settings • Byȱdefault,ȱtheȱmaterialȱselectionȱsettingsȱonȱtheȱribbonȱcorrespondȱtoȱ theȱmodelȱcartridgesȱloadedȱinȱtheȱprinter. • Theȱmaterialȱdisplayedȱonȱtheȱtopȱ(VeroBlack,ȱinȱtheȱfigureȱabove)ȱisȱ consideredȱtheȱprimaryȱmodelȱmaterialȱ(“ModelȬ1”).ȱItȱisȱassignedȱtoȱ objectsȱthatȱdoȱnotȱhaveȱaȱmaterialȱassignmentȱwhenȱyouȱplaceȱthemȱonȱ theȱbuildȱtray.ȱForȱexample,ȱsinceȱstlȱfilesȱdoȱnotȱcontainȱinformationȱ aboutȱtheȱmodelȱmaterial,ȱObjetȱStudioȱassignsȱtheȱprimaryȱmodelȱ materialȱtoȱthem.ȱAlso,ȱifȱyouȱtryȱtoȱinsertȱobjdfȱfilesȱwhoseȱassignedȱ materialsȱareȱnotȱrecognizedȱbyȱyourȱversionȱofȱObjetȱStudio,ȱyouȱcanȱ insertȱtheȱfileȱbyȱsubstitutingȱtheȱprimaryȱmodelȱmaterialȱforȱtheȱ missingȱmaterials. • SelectȱSingle Materialȱifȱyouȱwantȱtoȱprintȱusingȱonlyȱoneȱmaterial—ȱofȱ theȱmaterialȱdropȬdownȱmenusȱcontainȱtheȱsameȱmaterial.ȱIfȱyouȱdecideȱ toȱprintȱwithȱmultipleȱmaterials,ȱtheȱmaterialȱinȱtheȱtopȱdropȬdownȱ menuȱremainsȱassignedȱtoȱtheȱobjectȱuntilȱyouȱselectȱanotherȱmaterial. • Ifȱyouȱinsertȱanȱobjdfȱfileȱintoȱanȱemptyȱbuildȱtray,ȱandȱtheȱmodelȬ materialȱassignmentȱdoesȱnotȱmatchȱtheȱsettingsȱonȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱ ribbon,ȱtheseȱsettingsȱareȱchangedȱautomatically.ȱHowever,ȱifȱthereȱisȱanȱ objectȱalreadyȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱwhoseȱmaterialsȱdoȱnotȱmatchȱtheȱ materialȱassignmentȱinȱtheȱobjdfȱfile,ȱyouȱcannotȱplaceȱtheȱnewȱobjectȱonȱ theȱtray.ȱToȱprintȱthisȱobject,ȱyouȱhaveȱtheȱfollowingȱoptions: Insteadȱofȱprintingȱitȱonȱtheȱsameȱbuildȱtray,ȱprintȱtheȱnewȱobjectȱasȱaȱ separateȱjob. Changeȱtheȱmaterialsȱassignedȱtoȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱtoȱmatchȱ thoseȱassignedȱtoȱtheȱnewȱobjectȱ(seeȱ“ChangingȱtheȱModelȱ Material”ȱandȱ“AssigningȱaȱModelȱMaterialȱtoȱObjects,”ȱbelow). Changeȱtheȱmaterialsȱassignedȱtoȱtheȱnewȱobjectȱbeforeȱinsertingȱit,ȱ soȱthereȱisȱnoȱconflictȱwithȱtheȱsettingsȱonȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon. To change the materials assigned to an object before inserting it: 1. OpenȱanotherȱObjetȱStudioȱwindow,ȱbyȱrunningȱtheȱapplicationȱfromȱ theȱWindowsȱStartȱmenu. 2. Insertȱtheȱnewȱobjectȱ(objdfȱfile)ȱintoȱtheȱemptyȱbuildȱtray. 5–20 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 3. ChangeȱtheȱmaterialȱselectionȱsettingsȱonȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbonȱtoȱ thoseȱusedȱonȱtheȱotherȱbuildȱtray. 4. Assignȱmaterialsȱtoȱtheȱobjectȱ(seeȱ“AssigningȱaȱModelȱMaterialȱtoȱ Objects”ȱonȱpage 22). 5. Selectȱtheȱobjectȱandȱcopyȱit. 6. DisplayȱtheȱotherȱObjetȱStudioȱwindow,ȱandȱpasteȱtheȱobjectȱontoȱtheȱ buildȱtray. Note: You can save the object with the new materials either as a new objdf file, or by saving the original file with the changes. Changing the Model Material WhenȱyouȱdesignȱaȱbuildȱtrayȱinȱObjetȱStudio,ȱyouȱcanȱuseȱmodelȱmaterialsȱ thatȱmightȱnotȱbeȱcurrentlyȱinstalledȱinȱtheȱprinter.ȱBecauseȱtheȱinstalledȱ materialsȱareȱdisplayedȱbyȱdefault,ȱchangeȱtheȱmaterialȱselectionȱsettingsȱonȱ theȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱifȱnecessary. Figure 5-25: Selecting a new model material DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–21 Using Objet Studio Assigning a Model Material to Objects Youȱcanȱassignȱanyȱofȱtheȱavailableȱȱtoȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱ To assign a model material to objects: 1. Selectȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱ(seeȱ“SelectingȱObjects”ȱonȱpage 18). Whenȱanȱobjectȱisȱselected,ȱitsȱproperties—includingȱmodelȱmaterials— areȱdisplayedȱonȱtheȱModelȱToolbarȱandȱonȱtheȱribbon. Ribbon Model Toolbar Figure 5-26: Object properties, on ribbon and Model Toolbar 2. DisplayȱtheȱmaterialȱdropȬdownȱlistȱandȱselectȱtheȱdesiredȱmaterial. Figure 5-27: Menu for assigning materials to objects WhenȱyouȱdeȬselectȱtheȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱitȱisȱdisplayed,ȱbyȱ default,ȱwithȱtheȱcolorȱofȱtheȱmaterialȱyouȱselected.ȱInȱtheȱsameȱway,ȱ youȱcanȱassignȱmodelȱmaterialsȱtoȱeachȱofȱtheȱindependentȱobjectsȱonȱ theȱbuildȱtray. To separate an object into independent, component parts (each an stl file), see “Splitting Objects into Components” on page 19. 5–22 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Surface Finish Modelsȱcanȱbeȱprintedȱwithȱaȱmatteȱorȱglossyȱsurfaceȱfinish.ȱToȱcreateȱaȱ matteȱfinish,ȱtheȱprinterȱsurroundsȱmodelsȱwithȱaȱthinȱlayerȱofȱsupportȱ material.ȱ To set the model finish: 1. Selectȱtheȱmodel. 2. SelectȱMatteȱ ȱorȱGlossyȱ inȱoneȱofȱtheȱfollowingȱplaces: • ModelȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱOptionsȱgroup • ModelȱToolbar • rightȬclickȱcontextȱmenuȱ(whenȱselectingȱtheȱmodel) YouȱcanȱconfigureȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱdistinguishȱbetweenȱobjects’ȱsurfaceȱ finishȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱbyȱcolor.ȱToȱconfigureȱhowȱObjetȱStudioȱdisplaysȱ objects,ȱseeȱ“SettingȱObjectȱColors”ȱonȱpage 41. Coating Objects Youȱcanȱprintȱcompositeȱmodelsȱwhereȱtheȱsurfaceȱlayerȱisȱaȱdifferentȱ materialȱthanȱtheȱinside.ȱThisȱcanȱbeȱusefulȱtoȱachieveȱuniqueȱmechanicalȱ andȱtexturalȱcharacteristics.ȱThisȱtechniqueȱisȱcalledȱ“coating.”ȱ To coat an object with a different model material: 1. Selectȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. 2. OnȱtheȱModelȱToolbarȱorȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱclickȱ TheȱCoatȱwithȱdialogȱboxȱopens. 3. SelectȱCoat Withȱand,ȱfromȱtheȱdropȬdownȱlist,ȱselectȱtheȱcoatingȱ material. Figure 5-28: Coating material selected 4. InȱtheȱThicknessȱfield,ȱenterȱaȱcoatingȱthicknessȱbetweenȱ0.3ȱandȱ3ȱ millimeters. Note: The coating thickness does not affect the external dimensions of the object, which remain unchanged. The coating layer replaces part of the main model material. 5. ClickȱApply. Note: When you de-select objects, they are displayed, by default, with colors representing the model-material. Even after adding a coating to an object, its color remains that of the main material, not the color of the coating material. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–23 Using Objet Studio To inspect, modify or remove the coating applied to an object: 1. OnȱtheȱModelȱToolbarȱorȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱclickȱ TheȱCoatȱwithȱdialogȱboxȱopens. 2. Performȱoneȱofȱtheȱfollowingȱactions— • Changeȱtheȱcoatingȱsettings,ȱandȱclickȱApply. • Toȱremoveȱtheȱcoating,ȱclearȱtheȱCoatȱWithȱcheckȱboxȱandȱclickȱApply. • Toȱkeepȱtheȱcurrentȱcoatingȱsettings,ȱclickȱApplyȱorȱCancel. Assigning Properties to Hidden Objects Toȱenableȱyouȱtoȱassignȱmaterialsȱandȱotherȱpropertiesȱtoȱpartsȱofȱobjectsȱ thatȱareȱhiddenȱfromȱviewȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱdisplay,ȱyouȱcanȱtemporarilyȱ turnȱoffȱtheȱdisplayȱofȱsomeȱobjects.ȱ To prevent the display of objects: 1. RightȬclickȱanȱobject,ȱeitherȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱorȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtree. 2. Fromȱtheȱmenuȱthatȱopens,ȱselectȱoneȱofȱtheȱfollowingȱoptions— • Hide,ȱtoȱcauseȱtheȱselectedȱobjectȱtoȱdisappear. • Hide Others,ȱtoȱcauseȱallȱotherȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱtoȱdisappear,ȱ soȱthatȱonlyȱtheȱselectedȱobjectȱisȱdisplayed. Alternately,ȱyouȱcanȱclearȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱnextȱtoȱtheȱnameȱofȱtheȱ objectȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtreeȱtoȱcauseȱthatȱobjectȱtoȱdisappear. Figure 5-29: All objects displayed 5–24 Figure 5-30: Outer object hidden DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Positioning Objects on the Build Tray Toȱproduceȱmodelsȱefficientlyȱandȱwithȱtheȱrequiredȱfinish,ȱitȱisȱimportantȱ toȱcarefullyȱpositionȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱObjetȱStudioȱsupportsȱtheȱ automaticȱpositioningȱofȱobjects.ȱHowever,ȱyouȱshouldȱcheckȱtoȱmakeȱsureȱ thatȱtheȱobjectsȱareȱorientatedȱoptimallyȱforȱyourȱneeds,ȱaccordingȱtoȱtheȱ considerationsȱexplainedȱinȱ“ModelȱOrientation”ȱonȱpage 26. Twoȱthingsȱthatȱaffectȱtheȱpositioningȱofȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱareȱ orientationȱandȱplacement.ȱYouȱcanȱletȱObjetȱStudioȱdetermineȱtheȱoptimumȱ orientationȱandȱposition,ȱorȱyouȱcanȱcontrolȱthem. Automatic Orientation Byȱdefault,ȱObjetȱStudioȱautomaticallyȱorientsȱobjects,ȱwhenȱplacedȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtray,ȱforȱtheȱshortestȱprintingȱtime.ȱ(Youȱcanȱlaterȱchangeȱtheȱ orientationȱmanually.)ȱHowever,ȱyouȱcanȱcancelȱautomaticȱorientationȱ whenȱplacingȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. To place an object on the build tray without automatic orientation: ¾ InȱtheȱInsertȱdialogȱbox,ȱmakeȱsureȱOrientȱAutomaticallyȱisȱnotȱselected. Figure 5-31: Orient Automatically option disabled You can change the default setting, so that automatic orientation is not applied unless you select the Orient Automatically check box each time you place an object on the build tray. To do this, see “Default Settings” on page 63. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–25 Using Objet Studio Automatic Placement Afterȱplacingȱseveralȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱyouȱcanȱletȱObjetȱStudioȱ arrangeȱthemȱbeforeȱprinting.ȱThisȱensuresȱthatȱtheȱobjectsȱareȱpositionedȱ properly,ȱandȱthatȱtheyȱwillȱbeȱprintedȱinȱtheȱshortestȱtimeȱandȱwithȱaȱ minimumȱofȱmaterial. To automatically arrange objects on the build tray: ¾ OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱclickȱ or— FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselect Automatic Placement. Theȱeffectsȱofȱautomaticȱpositioningȱareȱshownȱinȱtheȱfiguresȱbelow. Figure 5-32: Tray before objects are properly arranged Figure 5-33: Tray arrangement after applying Automatic Placement ¾ For best results, arrange the tray with Automatic Placement, on the Tray Settings ribbon, even if you inserted the objects with the Orient Automatically option. ¾ The physical characteristics of each type of Model material you use can affect the positioning of objects on the tray. Therefore, select materials before running Automatic Placement. Manual Positioning Youȱcanȱchangeȱtheȱpositionȱofȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray—evenȱifȱtheyȱwereȱ insertedȱwithȱtheȱOrientȱAutomaticallyȱoption.ȱConsiderationsȱforȱ positioningȱobjectsȱareȱpresentedȱinȱ“ModelȱOrientation,”ȱbelow.ȱToolsȱforȱ changingȱtheȱpositionȱofȱobjectsȱareȱpresentedȱinȱ“ManipulatingȱObjectsȱonȱ theȱBuildȱTray”ȱonȱpage 27. Model Orientation Theȱorientationȱofȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱaffectsȱhowȱquicklyȱandȱ efficientlyȱtheyȱwillȱbeȱproducedȱbyȱtheȱ3Dȱprinter,ȱwhereȱandȱhowȱmuchȱ supportȱmaterialȱisȱused,ȱandȱwhetherȱorȱnotȱmodelȱpartsȱwillȱhaveȱaȱglossyȱ finish.ȱTherefore,ȱyouȱshouldȱconsiderȱaȱvarietyȱofȱfactorsȱwhenȱdecidingȱ howȱtoȱplaceȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱtray,ȱusingȱtheȱfollowingȱpositioningȱrules.ȱ X-Y-Z Rule Thisȱruleȱconsidersȱaȱmodelȇsȱouterȱdimensions. ¾ SinceȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱmoveȱbackȱandȱforthȱalongȱtheȱXȬaxis,ȱtheȱprintingȱ timeȱalongȱthisȱaxisȱisȱrelativelyȱshort,ȱcomparedȱtoȱprintingȱtimeȱalongȱ theȱYȬaxisȱandȱZȬaxis.ȱFromȱthisȱpointȱofȱview,ȱitȱisȱadvisableȱtoȱplaceȱtheȱ objectȇsȱlargestȱdimensionȱalongȱtheȱXȬaxis. ¾ Anyȱsurfacesȱthatȱcomeȱintoȱcontactȱwithȱsupportȱmaterialsȱbecomeȱ matte. ¾ Sinceȱmodelsȱareȱbuiltȱup,ȱonȱtheȱZȬaxis,ȱinȱ16Ȭȱorȱ30Ȭmicronȱlayersȱ (accordingȱtoȱtheȱprintingȱmode),ȱitȱisȱveryȱtimeȬconsumingȱtoȱprintȱaȱ tallȱobject.ȱFromȱthisȱpointȱofȱview,ȱitȱisȱadvisableȱtoȱplaceȱtheȱobjectȇsȱ smallestȱdimensionȱalongȱtheȱZȬaxis. ¾ Sinceȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱmeasureȱaboutȱ2ȱinchesȱ(5ȱcentimeters)ȱonȱtheȱ YȬaxis,ȱmodelsȱmeasuringȱlessȱthanȱthisȱ(onȱtheȱYȬaxis)ȱareȱprintedȱinȱ oneȱpass.ȱFromȱthisȱpointȱofȱview,ȱitȱisȱadvisableȱtoȱplaceȱtheȱobjectȇsȱ intermediateȱdimensionȱalongȱtheȱYȬaxis. 5–26 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Tall-Left Rule Thisȱruleȱconsidersȱmodelsȱwhere,ȱafterȱbeingȱorientatedȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱ accordingȱtoȱotherȱconsiderations,ȱoneȱsideȱisȱtallerȱthanȱtheȱother. ¾ SinceȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱmoveȱalongȱtheȱXȬaxisȱfromȱleftȱtoȱright,ȱtallerȱ sectionsȱonȱtheȱrightȱrequireȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱtoȱscanȱunnecessarilyȱfromȱ theȱleftȱuntilȱreachingȱthem.ȱIf,ȱonȱtheȱotherȱhand,ȱtheȱtallerȱsectionsȱareȱ positionedȱonȱtheȱleftȱofȱtheȱtray,ȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱonlyȱhaveȱtoȱscanȱtheȱ modelȱuntilȱprintingȱtheseȱsections—onceȱtheȱlowerȱpartsȱhaveȱbeenȱ completed.ȱTherefore,ȱyouȱshouldȱpositionȱtheȱtallerȱsideȱofȱtheȱmodel,ȱ whenȱpossible,ȱonȱtheȱleft. The following rules are based on the fact that support material is not required on the top of the printed model. Recess-Up Rule Thisȱruleȱconsidersȱmodelsȱcontainingȱsurfaceȱrecesses. ¾ Recessesȱinȱtheȱsurfaceȱ(likeȱhollows,ȱdrillȱholes,ȱetc.)ȱshould,ȱwhenȱ possible,ȱbeȱpositionedȱfaceȬup. Fine-Surface Rule Thisȱruleȱconsidersȱmodelsȱthatȱhaveȱoneȱsideȱonȱwhichȱthereȱareȱfineȱ detailsȱ(likeȱtheȱkeypadȱsideȱofȱaȱtelephone). ¾ Theȱsideȱofȱtheȱmodelȱcontainingȱfineȱdetailsȱshould,ȱwhenȱpossible,ȱbeȱ positionedȱfaceȬup.ȱThisȱresultsȱinȱaȱsmoothȱfinish. Avoid Support-Material Rule Thisȱruleȱconsidersȱmodelsȱthatȱhaveȱlargeȱholesȱorȱhollows,ȱopenȱonȱatȱ leastȱoneȱsideȱ(likeȱaȱpipeȱorȱaȱcontainer). ¾ Itȱmayȱbeȱadvantageousȱtoȱprintȱaȱmodelȱstandingȱup,ȱsoȱsupportȱ materialȱdoesȱnotȱfillȱtheȱhollow,ȱevenȱthoughȱprintingȱtheȱmodelȱlyingȱ downȱwouldȱbeȱmuchȱfaster. Manipulating Objects on the Build Tray Positioning Objects on the Z-Axis Whenȱyouȱuseȱtheȱautomaticȱpositioningȱoptionȱtoȱarrangeȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtrayȱ(seeȱ“AutomaticȱOrientation”ȱonȱpage 25),ȱtheȱobjectsȱareȱ positionedȱdirectlyȱonȱtheȱtray.ȱIfȱyouȱdoȱnotȱinsertȱobjectsȱwithȱautomaticȱ positioning,ȱtheyȱoftenȱappearȱeitherȱaboveȱorȱbelowȱtheȱtray. In practice, the Stratasys system prints all models on the build tray on a onemillimeter bed of support material. The importance of positioning objects directly on the build tray with Objet Studio is to correctly display the objects on the screen. To position objects directly on the tray: 1. Selectȱtheȱobject. 2. FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱLay On. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–27 Using Objet Studio To ensure that objects are always positioned directly on the tray: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions,ȱandȱdisplayȱtheȱSettingsȱtab. Figure 5-34: Options dialog box, Settings tab 2. InȱtheȱAutomaticȱLayȱOnȱ(Gravity)ȱsection,ȱselectȱAlways.ȱ Other Z-axis options (in the Automatic Lay On section): • When under the tray—Theȱdisplayȱofȱobjectsȱthatȱareȱbelowȱtheȱbuildȱ trayȱisȱautomaticallyȱchangedȱsoȱthatȱtheȱobjectȱisȱatȱtrayȱlevel. • Never—Theȱdisplayȱofȱobjectsȱthatȱareȱaboveȱorȱbelowȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱ notȱchanged. Valid Object Placement Youȱcanȱensureȱthatȱmodelsȱdoȱnotȱoverlapȱwhenȱyouȱpositionȱthemȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtray,ȱandȱthatȱtheyȱdoȱnotȱextendȱbeyondȱtheȱtray.ȱ To ensure valid object placement: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱConstraints Settings. Figure 5-35: Constraints Settings dialog box 5–28 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 2. SelectȱDynamic checkȱtoȱidentify— • • • • invalidȱobjectȱplacementȱwhileȱplacingȱobjects—OnȱDropȱselected. invalidȱobjectȱplacementȱafterȱmovingȱobjects—WhileȱDragȱselected. objectsȱplacedȱbeyondȱtheȱtray’sȱboundaries—OutsideȱTrayȱselected. objectsȱthatȱoverlap—ObjectȱCollisionȱselected. Even if you do not use Dynamic Check when placing objects on the build tray, Objet Studio automatically checks if there is a problem with the positioning of objects on the tray before sending it to the printer. You can also manually check for problems after positioning objects (see “Tray Validation” on page 45). Note: Because of the unique characteristics of each type of model material and finish, always check valid placement after changing the material/ finish. Remember that Objet Studio calculates the space occupied by an object including the “bounding box” surrounding it (see figure 5-50 on page 38). DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–29 Using Objet Studio Using a Grid to Position Objects Displayingȱaȱgridȱonȱtheȱimageȱofȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱcanȱbeȱusefulȱwhenȱ positioningȱobjects.ȱToȱuseȱtheȱgridȱfeatures,ȱselectȱtheȱfollowingȱmenuȱ options.ȱ Menu Option Result Toolsȱ>ȱGrid Displaysȱaȱgridȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. Toolsȱ>ȱSnapȱtoȱgrid Whenȱmovingȱtheȱobject,ȱitȱalignsȱwithȱtheȱnearestȱ gridȱline. Toolsȱ>ȱOptionsȱ>ȱ Grid Enablesȱyouȱtoȱchangeȱtheȱgridȱoriginȱ (XȬȱandȱYȬaxisȱmeetingȱpoint)ȱandȱappearance. Youȱcanȱreviewȱandȱconfigureȱgridȱsettings—andȱapplyȱthem—fromȱtheȱ Optionsȱdialogȱbox. To view and change grid settings: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions,ȱandȱdisplayȱtheȱGridȱtab. Theȱcurrentȱgridȱsettingsȱareȱdisplayed. Figure 5-36: Options dialog box, Grid tab 2. Asȱrequired,ȱchangeȱtheȱsettings,ȱandȱselectȱorȱclearȱtheȱcheckȱboxes. 3. ClickȱApplyȱorȱOK. 5–30 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Measurement Units 3Dȱfilesȱcontainȱanȱobjectȇsȱproportions,ȱbutȱnotȱitsȱunitsȱofȱmeasure.ȱ Therefore,ȱmakeȱsureȱtoȱcorrectlyȱselectȱeitherȱmillimetersȱorȱinchesȱwhenȱ insertingȱanȱobject.ȱOtherwise,ȱtheȱsizeȱofȱtheȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱwillȱbeȱ eitherȱmuchȱtooȱlargeȱorȱmuchȱtooȱsmall.ȱ To set the measurement units when inserting an object: ¾ InȱtheȱInsertȱdialogȱbox,ȱUnitsȱfield,ȱselectȱMillimeterȱorȱInch: Figure 5-37: Units field in the Insert dialog box To change measurement units for a selected object from the Model Settings ribbon: 1. OpenȱtheȱUnitsȱflyoutȱtoolbar. Figure 5-38: Units flyout toolbar 2. Selectȱtheȱmeasurementȱunitsȱdesired. To change measurement units for a selected object from the standard toolbar: 1. FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱChange Units. Figure 5-39: Model Units dialog box 2. InȱtheȱModelȱUnitsȱdialogȱbox,ȱchangeȱtheȱsettingȱandȱclickȱOK. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–31 Using Objet Studio Setting Model Dimensions Youȱcanȱchangeȱanȱobject’sȱdimensionsȱbyȱchangingȱitsȱsizeȱonȱtheȱXȬ,ȱYȬ,ȱ andȱZȬaxes,ȱfromȱtheȱDimensionsȱgroupȱonȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon. Figure 5-40: Dimensions on the Model Settings ribbon • IfȱUniformȱScaleȱisȱenabled,ȱchangingȱtheȱobject’sȱdimensionȱonȱoneȱaxisȱ affectsȱtheȱotherȱdimensions,ȱproportionately. • Afterȱchangingȱaȱmeasurement,ȱpressȱEnterȱorȱclickȱinȱanotherȱfieldȱinȱ theȱDimensionsȱgroup. Note: You can change the height of the objects on the build tray only if this is allowed by the Objet Studio settings (see “Positioning Objects on the Z-Axis” on page 27). Repositioning Objects Youȱcanȱmanuallyȱmoveȱandȱrotateȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱwithȱtheȱ arrowȱkeys,ȱorȱbyȱdraggingȱitȱwithȱtheȱmouse. To manually manipulate an object: 1. Selectȱanȱobjectȱbyȱclickingȱitȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱorȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtreeȱ pane.ȱ 2. Clickȱ ȱonȱtheȱModelȱToolbar,ȱorȱonȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon. Aȱframeȱappearsȱaroundȱtheȱobject,ȱandȱtheȱcursorȱchangesȱtoȱindicateȱ thatȱtheȱobjectȱcanȱbeȱmoved. Figure 5-41: Manually moving an object 5–32 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 3. Ifȱyouȱclickȱonȱaȱcornerȱofȱtheȱframe,ȱtheȱcursorȱchangesȱtoȱindicateȱthatȱ theȱobjectȱcanȱbeȱrotated. Figure 5-42: Manually rotating an object 4. Manipulateȱtheȱobjectȱwithȱtheȱarrowȱkeysȱorȱwithȱtheȱmouse. Using the Transform Dialog Box Youȱcanȱmakeȱpreciseȱchangesȱtoȱanȱobjectȱbyȱchangingȱtheȱpropertiesȱinȱtheȱ Transformȱdialogȱbox. To access the Transform dialog box (when an object is selected): • Clickȱ ȱonȱtheȱModelȱToolbarȱorȱonȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon. • FromȱtheȱrightȬclickȱcontextȱmenu,ȱselectȱTransform. • FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱTransform. Figure 5-43: Transform dialog box To change an object with the Transform dialog box: ¾ Changeȱanyȱofȱtheȱvalues,ȱthenȱclickȱApplyȱtoȱseeȱhowȱtheȱobjectȱchangesȱ onȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱ Note: The changed values remain in the dialog box after clicking Apply. Therefore, you can make small changes to values in the dialog box to see how the object changes on screen each time you click Apply. To reset all of the values in the dialog box: ¾ ClickȱReset. Note: The object does not change. Any changes previously applied remain. To undo all changes made with the Transform dialog box: ¾ ClickȱCancel Actions. After closing the Transform dialog box, clicking Undo (on the Model Settings ribbon or from the Edit menu) cancels all changes made with the dialog box. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–33 Using Objet Studio Changing an Object’s Orientation Thereȱareȱseveralȱmethodsȱforȱchangingȱtheȱorientationȱofȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱ buildȱtray. To rotate an object: ¾ SelectȱtheȱobjectȱandȱuseȱtheȱObjectȱmenuȱoptionsȱ(seeȱalsoȱ “RepositioningȱObjects”ȱonȱpage 32). To re-align an object’s plane: 1. OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱorȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon— a. ClickȱtheȱiconȱinȱtheȱSelectionȱgroup:ȱ ȱorȱ b. Onȱtheȱflyoutȱtoolbar,ȱclickȱtheȱSelectȱPlaneȱicon: or— FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱPlane Alignment > Select Plane. 2. Clickȱonȱpartȱofȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. Theȱselectedȱplaneȱisȱdisplayed. Alignment toolbar Selected plane Figure 5-44: Aligning by plane 5–34 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 3. OnȱtheȱAlignmentȱtoolbar,ȱclickȱanȱappropriateȱiconȱtoȱchangeȱtheȱ alignment.ȱ or— FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱPlane Alignment,ȱandȱselectȱanȱalignmentȱ option. Figure 5-45: Tools menu, Plane Alignment options To cancel plane selection after re-aligning objects on the build tray: ¾ OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱorȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon— a. ClickȱtheȱiconȱinȱtheȱSelectionȱgroup:ȱ ȱorȱ b. Onȱtheȱflyoutȱtoolbar,ȱclickȱtheȱSelectȱElementȱorȱSelectȱGroupȱicon: or— ¾ FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱPlane Alignment > Select Plane. To flip an object 180 degrees on any axis: 1. Selectȱtheȱobject. 2. FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱFlip > Flip X / Flip Y / Flip Z. To make precise changes to the object’s orientation on any axis: 1. Selectȱtheȱobject.ȱ 2. DisplayȱtheȱTransformȱdialogȱboxȱ(seeȱfigure 5Ȭ43ȱonȱpage 33). 3. ChangeȱtheȱRotateȱparametersȱforȱeachȱaxis. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–35 Using Objet Studio Grouping and Ungrouping Objects Youȱcanȱmanipulateȱtwoȱorȱmoreȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱatȱtheȱsameȱtime. • Selectingȱmultipleȱobjects Manipulatingȱdoneȱtoȱoneȱobjectȱaffectsȱallȱselectedȱobjects.ȱForȱ example,ȱturningȱoneȱobjectȱonȱitsȱaxisȱcausesȱallȱselectedȱobjectsȱtoȱturnȱ onȱtheirȱrespectiveȱaxes. • Convertingȱtheȱobjectsȱtoȱanȱassembly Separateȱobjectsȱbecomeȱpartsȱofȱoneȱunit.ȱForȱexample,ȱturningȱtheȱ assemblyȱonȱitsȱaxisȱcausesȱallȱitsȱcomponentȱpartsȱtoȱturnȱasȱoneȱunit. To convert objects to an assembly: 1. Selectȱtheȱobjectsȱ(seeȱ“SelectingȱObjects”ȱonȱpage 18) 2. FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱGroup to Assembly. Inȱtheȱmodelȱtree,ȱtheȱobjectsȱnowȱappearȱasȱchildrenȱofȱaȱparentȱ (assembly).ȱ Figure 5-46: Assembly in the model tree Afterȱcreatingȱanȱassembly,ȱyouȱcanȱsaveȱitȱasȱanȱobjdfȱfile,ȱforȱreȬuse.ȱ (Savingȱtheȱassemblyȱisȱnotȱnecessaryȱforȱmanipulatingȱandȱprintingȱit.) To save an assembly: 1. Selectȱtheȱassemblyȱ(eitherȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱorȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtree). 2. FromȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ , selectȱSave As. 3. Inȱthe SaveȱAsȱdialogȱbox,ȱselectȱtheȱobjdfȱformat,ȱchooseȱaȱlocation,ȱ nameȱtheȱfile,ȱandȱclickȱSave. To separate assemblies into individual objects (stl files): 1. Selectȱtheȱassemblyȱ(eitherȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱorȱinȱtheȱmodelȱtree). 2. FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱUngroup. Inȱtheȱmodelȱtree,ȱtheȱelementsȱareȱnotȱpartsȱofȱanȱassembly. Figure 5-47: Separate objects in the model tree 5–36 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Freezing Model Orientation Ifȱyouȱmanipulateȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱyouȱcanȱfreezeȱitsȱorientationȱ soȱthatȱitȱdoesȱnotȱchangeȱwhenȱyouȱpositionȱitȱautomaticallyȱ(seeȱ “AutomaticȱPlacement”ȱonȱpage 26). To freeze an object: 1. Selectȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. 2. OnȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱManipulateȱgroup,ȱorȱonȱtheȱModelȱ Toolbar,ȱclickȱ . To unfreeze an object: ¾ Selectȱtheȱobjectȱandȱclickȱ ȱ(toȱdeȬselectȱit). Display Options Viewing Objects FromȱtheȱViewȱmenu,ȱyouȱcanȱchangeȱtheȱwayȱobjectsȱareȱdisplayed.ȱTheȱ defaultȱmethodȱforȱdisplayingȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱasȱsolidȱ (“shaded”)ȱobjects.ȱ Figure 5-48: Tray and model displayed in Shaded view TheȱotherȱdisplayȱoptionsȱareȱWireFrameȱandȱPoints. To display the build tray in WireFrame view: ¾ FromȱtheȱViewȱmenu,ȱselectȱWireFrame. Figure 5-49: Tray and model displayed in WireFrame view To revert to the shaded view: ¾ FromȱtheȱViewȱmenu,ȱselect Shaded. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–37 Using Objet Studio To display objects as boxes, showing their maximum dimensions instead of their shape: ¾ FromȱtheȱViewȱmenu,ȱselect Display Bounding Box. Figure 5-50: Model displayed with bounding box To display the area around objects needed for support material (to produce a matte finish): ¾ FromȱtheȱViewȱmenu,ȱselect Display Thickening Box. Figure 5-51: Model displayed with thickening box To display the maximum build height: ¾ FromȱtheȱViewȱmenu,ȱselectȱDisplay Tray 3D Box. Figure 5-52: Tray 3D Box To display objects without the build tray: ¾ FromȱtheȱViewȱmenu,ȱclearȱ(deȬselect)ȱtheȱDisplayȱTrayȱoption. 5–38 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Screen Layout ObjetȱStudioȱautomaticallyȱadjustsȱtheȱdefaultȱscreenȱlayoutȱtoȱdisplayȱtheȱ optimumȱviewsȱofȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱandȱtheȱmodelȱtree.ȱYouȱcanȱviewȱmodelsȱ fromȱdifferentȱperspectivesȱbyȱchangingȱtheȱscreenȱlayout. To change the screen layout: ¾ OnȱtheȱViewȱflyoutȱtoolbar,ȱselectȱSingle View,ȱorȱ4 Views. Figure 5-53: Screen layout icons Single View 4 Viewsȱ ȱisȱtheȱdefaultȱscreenȱlayout. ȱdisplaysȱperspective,ȱtop,ȱfrontȱandȱrightȱviews. Figure 5-54: Single-view screen layout Figure 5-55: 4-view screen layout Tray Perspective Theȱdefaultȱperspectiveȱofȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱ“isometric.”ȱYouȱcanȱchangeȱtheȱ perspectiveȱofȱtheȱactiveȱwindowȱwithȱoneȱofȱtenȱoptions. To change the perspective of the build tray in the active window: 1. OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱopenȱtheȱPerspectiveȱflyoutȱtoolbar. Figure 5-56: Perspective flyout toolbar 2. Clickȱtheȱiconȱthatȱrepresentsȱtheȱdesiredȱperspective. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–39 Using Objet Studio Tray Positioning Toȱviewȱtheȱtrayȱandȱmodelsȱfromȱdifferentȱdirections,ȱyouȱcanȱmoveȱtheȱ trayȱaroundȱtheȱscreenȱandȱchangeȱitsȱdisplayȱangle. To move the tray in the Objet Studio screen: ¾ Pressȱtheȱmouseȱwheelȱwhileȱmovingȱtheȱmouse. Figure 5-57: Tray after moving it in the Objet Studio display To manually rotate the tray: ¾ PressȱAltȱandȱpressȱtheȱmouseȱwheelȱwhileȱmovingȱtheȱmouse. Figure 5-58: Tray after rotating it upside-down 5–40 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Setting Object Colors Theȱcolorȱofȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱcanȱindicateȱhowȱtheyȱareȱprinted.ȱ ObjetȱStudioȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱchooseȱtheȱcolorȱdisplayȱsoȱthatȱyouȱcanȱeasilyȱ seeȱtheȱmaterial,ȱsurfaceȱandȱcoatingȱofȱobjects. To choose how colors are applied on the display: ¾ OnȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱColorsȱgroup,ȱselectȱoneȱofȱtheȱ optionsȱfromȱtheȱflyoutȱtoolbar. Color Indicates Model material Color indicates Model surface Color indicates if coating is used Figure 5-59: Colors display options Before sending a build tray to the printer, or when you perform tray validation, Objet Studio checks if there is a problem with the stl files or the positioning of objects on the tray. If so, the affected objects are displayed with special colors (see “Tray Validation” on page 45). Loading Large Files Veryȱlargeȱstlȱfilesȱcanȱbeȱslowȱtoȱloadȱandȱmayȱbeȱdifficultȱtoȱmanipulateȱ easilyȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱIfȱthisȱisȱtheȱcase,ȱyouȱcanȱdisplayȱjustȱanȱimageȱofȱ theȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱwithoutȱloadingȱtheȱentireȱfile.ȱTheȱstlȱfileȱitselfȱ isȱnotȱchanged,ȱandȱtheȱcompleteȱfileȱisȱsentȱtoȱtheȱprinter. To display an image of stl files when you place objects on the build tray: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions,ȱandȱdisplayȱtheȱSettingsȱtab. Figure 5-60: Options dialog box, Settings tab 2. InȱtheȱLargeȱFilesȱsection,ȱselectȱLoad Partial (reduced).ȱ DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–41 Using Objet Studio Large File Manipulation Ifȱyouȱneedȱtoȱworkȱwithȱaȱdetailedȱmodelȱthatȱisȱcomposedȱofȱaȱlargeȱ numberȱofȱpolygons,ȱyouȱcanȱspeedȱupȱitsȱdisplayȱandȱmanipulationȱinȱ ObjetȱStudioȱbyȱreducingȱtheȱnumberȱofȱpolygonsȱonȱtheȱscreen.ȱAlthoughȱ thisȱmayȱreduceȱtheȱresolutionȱonȱtheȱscreen,ȱitȱhasȱnoȱaffectȱonȱtheȱprintedȱ models. Figure 5-61: Object displayed without polygon reduction Figure 5-62: Object displayed with only five percent of its polygons showing To use polygon reduction: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions. or— FromȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱclickȱOptions. 2. InȱtheȱOptionsȱdialogȱbox,ȱdisplayȱtheȱDisplayȱtab. Figure 5-63: Options dialog box, Display tab 3. SelectȱEnable Polygon Reduction. 5–42 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 4. SelectȱPolygon Reduction (Percent). 5. Enterȱtheȱpercentageȱofȱtotalȱpolygonsȱtoȱdisplay. WhenȱyouȱclickȱApply,ȱtheȱdisplayȱchanges. Note: The setting affects the static display (when the object is not being moved). 6. Setȱdisplayȱoptionsȱwhenȱtheȱobjectȱisȱbeingȱmovedȱ(Displayȱwhileȱ changingȱview): • BoundingȱBox—Aȱboxȱrepresentingȱtheȱobject’sȱmaximumȱ dimensionsȱisȱdisplayed. • AdaptiveȱPolygonȱReduction—Varyingȱdegreesȱofȱpolygonȱreductionȱ areȱapplied,ȱasȱnecessary. • EntireȱObject—Noȱpolygonȱreductionȱisȱapplied. 7. Toȱsaveȱtheseȱsettings,ȱsoȱthatȱtheyȱwillȱbeȱappliedȱeveryȱtimeȱyouȱplaceȱ thisȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱclickȱSave Polygon Reduction Data. 8. ClickȱApplyȱtoȱseeȱtheȱresultsȱofȱtheȱsettingsȱwithoutȱclosingȱtheȱdialogȱ box. Selecting the Entire Object option cancels polygon reduction. Object display options Theȱdisplayȱformatȱaffectsȱhowȱquicklyȱobjectsȱdisplay.ȱForȱexample,ȱifȱyouȱ selectȱBounding Box,ȱobjectsȱdisplayȱfasterȱthanȱtheyȱdoȱwhenȱyouȱselectȱ Entire Object.ȱYouȱcanȱchooseȱdisplayȱformatsȱforȱobjectsȱwhenȱtheyȱareȱ stationaryȱ(staticȱview)ȱandȱforȱwhenȱyouȱareȱdraggingȱthemȱ(changingȱview). To select the object display preference while changing view, and in static view: 1. Selectȱtoȱdisplayȱobjects: • • • • WithȱaȱBoundingȱBoxȱ(seeȱfigure 5Ȭ50ȱonȱpage 38) WithȱAdaptiveȱPolygonȱReductionȱ(changingȱviewȱonly) WithȱPolygonȱReductionȱ(staticȱviewȱonly) EntireȱObject 2. ClickȱOKȱwhenȱdone. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–43 Using Objet Studio Zoom Options Whileȱmanipulatingȱobjects,ȱyouȱoftenȱneedȱtoȱviewȱthemȱatȱdifferentȱzoomȱ levels.ȱ To change the zoom level: ¾ Onȱtheȱribbon,ȱopenȱtheȱZoomȱflyoutȱtoolbarȱandȱselectȱanȱoption: Zoom Object Zoom Tray Zoom by Rectangle Figure 5-64: Zoom flyout toolbar ZoomȱObjectȱfocusesȱonȱtheȱselectedȱobject. ZoomȱTrayȱdisplaysȱtheȱwholeȱtray. ZoomȱbyȱRectangleȱallowsȱyouȱtoȱdisplayȱaȱsectionȱofȱtheȱtrayȱbyȱ selectingȱitȱwithȱtheȱmouse.ȱ Youȱcanȱalsoȱzoomȱinȱandȱzoomȱoutȱwithȱtheȱmouseȱwheel. You can configure Objet Studio to automatically zoom in on the objects placed on the build tray. See “Automatic Zoom” on page 63. 5–44 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Handling Completed Trays Afterȱyouȱhaveȱproperlyȱplacedȱallȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱyouȱsaveȱtheȱ trayȱasȱanȱobjtfȱfile,ȱwhichȱisȱsentȱtoȱtheȱ3Dȱprinterȱforȱproduction.ȱButȱbeforeȱ savingȱtheȱtray,ȱyouȱcanȱcheckȱthatȱthereȱwouldȱbeȱnoȱproblemȱproducingȱit.ȱ Youȱcanȱalsoȱcalculateȱhowȱmuchȱmaterialȱwouldȱbeȱconsumedȱduringȱ productionȱandȱhowȱmuchȱtimeȱthisȱwouldȱtake. Tray Validation Beforeȱsendingȱaȱjobȱtoȱtheȱprinterȱforȱproduction,ȱyouȱshouldȱcheckȱthatȱ theȱtrayȱisȱ“valid”ȱandȱcanȱbeȱprinted. Note: Because of the unique characteristics of each type of modeling material, make sure that the correct material is selected before performing Tray Validation. To validate that the tray can be printed: ¾ OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱBuildȱProcessȱgroup,ȱclickȱ or— FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱPlacement Validation. Ifȱtheȱtrayȱisȱnotȱvalid,ȱtheȱcolorȱofȱtheȱproblematicȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱtrayȱ changesȱaccordingȱtoȱaȱpreȬsetȱcode. Figure 5-65: Color code Note: The “Both” color also indicates a problematic stl file. Theȱvalidationȱstatusȱappearsȱonȱtheȱbarȱatȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱscreen. Figure 5-66: Validation details in status bar DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–45 Using Objet Studio Production Estimates ObjetȱStudioȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱcalculateȱtheȱtimeȱandȱmaterialȱresourcesȱ neededȱforȱproducingȱtraysȱbeforeȱsendingȱthemȱtoȱtheȱprinter.ȱTheȱtimeȱitȱ takesȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱperformȱthisȱcalculationȱdependsȱonȱtheȱnumberȱofȱ objectsȱonȱtheȱtrayȱandȱtheirȱcomplexity.ȱCalculatingȱtheȱproductionȱ estimateȱforȱaȱfullȱtrayȱcouldȱtakeȱupȱtoȱ15ȱminutes,ȱdependingȱonȱyourȱ computer’sȱspecifications.ȱ To calculate the time and materials needed for producing the current tray: ¾ OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱBuildȱProcessȱgroup,ȱclickȱ Whileȱtheȱestimateȱisȱbeingȱcalculated,ȱaȱprogressȱbarȱisȱdisplayed—onȱ theȱrightȱsideȱofȱtheȱstatusȱbarȱ(atȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱscreen).ȱ Cancel Figure 5-67: Estimate progress bar WhenȱObjetȱStudioȱfinishesȱcalculatingȱtheȱproductionȱresources,ȱtheȱ resultsȱareȱdisplayedȱinȱaȱdialogȱbox. Figure 5-68: Production resource calculations for different printing modes AsȱshownȱinȱtheȱProductionȱEstimatesȱdialogȱbox,ȱtheȱresourcesȱneededȱforȱ producingȱtheȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱtrayȱdependȱonȱtheȱprintingȱmodeȱusedȱbyȱtheȱ printerȱwhenȱproducingȱtheȱjob.ȱYouȱmightȱwantȱtoȱconsiderȱtheseȱ estimatesȱwhenȱdecidingȱonȱtheȱprintingȱmodeȱ(seeȱbelow),ȱandȱwhetherȱorȱ notȱtoȱallowȱusingȱsubstituteȱmodelȱmaterialsȱwhenȱprintingȱtheȱjob.ȱ Note: You select the printing mode and material substitute options after you send the build tray to the printer (see “Printing the Tray File” on page 48). 5–46 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Printing Modes Stratasysȱprintersȱcanȱbuildȱmodelsȱusingȱthreeȱpossibleȱprintingȱmodes. HQ (High Quality) Mode— • Modelsȱareȱprintedȱinȱ16Ȭmicronȱlayers,ȱresultingȱinȱsmoothȱsurfaces,ȱ suitableȱforȱproducingȱfineȬdetailedȱandȱdelicateȱitems. • Almostȱtwiceȱasȱmuchȱtimeȱisȱrequiredȱtoȱprintȱmostȱtrays,ȱcomparedȱtoȱ theȱHigh Speedȱsetting. • Thisȱsettingȱisȱonlyȱavailableȱwhenȱmodelȱmaterialȱcanȱbeȱusedȱinȱfourȱ printȱheads,ȱinȱsingleȬmaterialȱprinting. Single-material printing: All print heads print models without regard to the source of the model material. This happens in the following situations: ¾ All print heads are supplied with one model material. ¾ Each pair of print heads is supplied with a different model material, but models are printed as if they were the same material. The result is an arbitrary mixture of materials in the printed model. HS (High Speed) Mode— • Modelsȱareȱproducedȱinȱ30Ȭmicronȱlayers,ȱsuitableȱforȱproducingȱlargerȱ models. • Muchȱlessȱtimeȱisȱrequiredȱtoȱprintȱmostȱtrays,ȱcomparedȱtoȱtheȱ High Qualityȱsetting. • Thisȱsettingȱisȱonlyȱavailableȱwhenȱmodelȱmaterialȱcanȱbeȱusedȱinȱfourȱ printȱheads,ȱinȱsingleȬmaterialȱprinting. Digital Material Mode— • Usedȱwhenȱproducingȱtraysȱdesignedȱtoȱbeȱfabricatedȱfromȱ. • Usedȱwhenȱproducingȱaȱtrayȱcontainingȱtwoȱorȱmoreȱmodels,ȱeachȱ designedȱtoȱbeȱmadeȱfromȱaȱdifferentȱ(single)ȱmodelȱmaterial. • Usedȱwhenȱproducingȱmodelsȱfromȱonlyȱoneȱofȱtheȱmodelȱmaterialsȱ loadedȱinȱtheȱprinterȱbyȱprintingȱwithȱonlyȱtwoȱofȱtheȱprintȱheads.ȱ • Modelsȱareȱproducedȱinȱ30Ȭmicronȱlayers,ȱbutȱtheȱprintingȱisȱnearȬhighȱ quality. • PrintingȱtimeȱisȱsimilarȱtoȱprintingȱtimeȱinȱHighȱQualityȱmode. AlthoughȱprintingȱtimeȱisȱlongerȱthanȱwithȱHighȱSpeedȱmode,ȱDigitalȱ Materialȱmodeȱcanȱmakeȱmaterialȱreplacementȱunnecessary—savingȱ bothȱtimeȱandȱtheȱcostȱofȱwastedȱmodelȱmaterial. Digital Material Mode is selected automatically when more than one model material is assigned to objects on the tray. Youȱcanȱseeȱestimatesȱofȱtimeȱandȱmaterialȱresourcesȱneededȱforȱprintingȱ traysȱusingȱtheȱdifferentȱprintingȱmodesȱ(seeȱ“ProductionȱEstimates”ȱonȱ page 46).ȱYouȱalsoȱseeȱtheseȱproductionȱestimatesȱwhenȱyouȱsendȱtheȱtrayȱ toȱtheȱprinter.ȱAtȱthatȱtime,ȱyouȱcanȱselectȱtheȱprintingȱmode,ȱincludingȱanȱ optionȱthatȱenablesȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱprintȱtheȱtrayȱbyȱtheȱmostȱefficientȱ methodȱ(seeȱ“PrintingȬModeȱSelection”ȱonȱpage 48). DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–47 Using Objet Studio E-mailing Objet Digital Files YouȱcanȱeasilyȱeȬmailȱobjdfȱfilesȱusingȱMicrosoft®ȱOfficeȱOutlook®.ȱSendingȱ objdfȱfilesȱisȱrecommendedȱ(insteadȱofȱstlȱfiles)ȱbecauseȱtheȱsizeȱofȱaȱfileȱisȱ typicallyȱreducedȱbyȱmoreȱthanȱhalf.ȱAnȱaddedȱbenefitȱisȱthatȱtheȱobjdfȱfileȱ containsȱtheȱmodelȬmaterialȱinformationȱforȱtheȱobject. To e-mail a file: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱEmail Objet Digital File. OutlookȱopensȱwithȱtheȱfileȱattachedȱandȱSubjectȱdetailsȱaddedȱtoȱtheȱ eȬmailȱform. 2. EnterȱtheȱeȬmailȱaddressȱandȱsendȱtheȱfile. Printing the Tray File Whenȱaȱtrayȱisȱreadyȱtoȱbeȱprinted,ȱitȱisȱplacedȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueue.ȱWhenȱtheȱ jobȱreachesȱtheȱheadȱofȱtheȱqueue,ȱObjetȱStudioȱpreȬprocessesȱtheȱtrayȱfileȱtoȱ createȱslices,ȱandȱfeedsȱthemȱtoȱtheȱ3Dȱprinter. To send the tray to the print queue: 1. OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱBuildȱProcessȱgroup,ȱclickȱ • Ifȱprintingȱtheȱtrayȱrequiresȱȱ(DigitalȱMaterialȱmode),ȱtheȱJobȱ Summaryȱdialogȱboxȱopens.ȱ Figure 5-69: Job Summary when printing with multiple model materials Note:The values displayed are the result of a quick calculation, and represent a rough estimate of the materials and time input required to print the job. For a more accurate calculation, click Fine Estimation. Continueȱwithȱstepȱ4ȱonȱpage 5Ȭ50. • Ifȱprintingȱtheȱtrayȱrequiresȱonlyȱoneȱmodelȱmaterial,ȱtheȱPrintingȱ ModeȱSelectionȱdialogȱboxȱopens. Figure 5-70: Printing Mode Selection dialog box Note:The values displayed are the result of a quick calculation, and represent a rough estimate of the materials and time input required to print the job. For a more accurate calculation, click Fine Estimation. Printing-Mode Selection 2. Selectȱtheȱappropriateȱprintingȱmode. • IfȱyouȱrequireȱtheȱjobȱtoȱbeȱprintedȱinȱHighȱQualityȱmode,ȱselectȱthisȱ option. Note:The availability of High Quality mode depends on the material selected. • IfȱyouȱrequireȱtheȱjobȱtoȱbeȱprintedȱinȱHighȱSpeedȱmode,ȱselectȱthisȱ option. • IfȱyouȱdoȱnotȱrequireȱtheȱjobȱtoȱbeȱprintedȱeitherȱinȱHighȱQualityȱorȱ HighȱSpeedȱmode,ȱselectȱAutomatic.ȱ 5–48 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide ThisȱsettingȱenablesȱtheȱStratasysȱsoftwareȱtoȱdetermineȱ(justȱbeforeȱ printing)ȱtheȱmostȱefficientȱwayȱtoȱprintȱtheȱtray.ȱDigitalȱMaterialȱmodeȱ isȱusedȱifȱthisȱremovesȱtheȱneedȱtoȱperformȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱ procedure.ȱOtherwise,ȱHighȱSpeedȱmodeȱisȱused. Forȱexample,ȱifȱprintingȱtheȱtrayȱrequiresȱonlyȱoneȱofȱtheȱmodelȱ materialsȱloadedȱinȱtheȱprinter,ȱonlyȱtheȱtwoȱprintȱheadsȱusingȱthatȱ materialȱareȱusedȱtoȱprintȱmodels—DigitalȱMaterialȱmode.ȱ(Highȱ QualityȱandȱHighȱSpeedȱmodesȱcallȱforȱprintingȱmodelȱmaterialȱwithȱ fourȱheads,ȱwhichȱwouldȱrequireȱyouȱtoȱperformȱtheȱMaterialȱ Replacementȱprocedure.) Onȱtheȱotherȱhand,ȱifȱprintingȱtheȱtrayȱcanȱbeȱdoneȱusingȱfourȱprintȱ headsȱwithoutȱrunningȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱprocedure,ȱHighȱ Speedȱmodeȱisȱused.ȱThisȱisȱpossibleȱifȱallȱprintȱheadsȱareȱsuppliedȱwithȱ oneȱmodelȱmaterial,ȱorȱifȱyouȱallowȱprintingȱwithȱanȱarbitraryȱmixtureȱ ofȱsimilarȱmaterialsȱ(seeȱbelow). Model Quality When Digital Material Mode is Used ¾ Near-high-quality is achieved for most models. ¾ If all objects on the tray are inserted from individual stl files, they are printed with the standard resolution of 600 dpi (dots per inch) along the Y-axis—unless glossy finish is required (see “Surface Finish” on page 23). ¾ If there is an assembly on the tray, all of the models on the tray are printed with a resolution of 300 dpi along the Y-axis. 3. ClickȱNext. TheȱModelȱMaterialȱSubstitutionȱdialogȱboxȱopens—ifȱthisȱisȱrelevantȱforȱ theȱtray.ȱ(Ifȱnot,ȱtheȱJobȱSummaryȱdialogȱboxȱopens—continueȱwithȱ step 4.) Model Material Substitution Figure 5-71: Model Material Substitution dialog box Ifȱyouȱallowȱtheȱuseȱofȱsubstituteȱmodelȱmaterials,ȱtheȱprinterȱwillȱuseȱ differentȱmaterialsȱwhoseȱcharacteristicsȱ(strength,ȱflexibility,ȱetc.)ȱareȱ similarȱtoȱthoseȱofȱtheȱmaterialȱyouȱassignedȱtoȱtheȱobjectȱwhenȱ designingȱtheȱbuildȱtray—underȱtheȱfollowingȱconditions: • Theȱmaterialȱyouȱassignedȱisȱnotȱinstalledȱinȱtheȱprinterȱatȱtheȱtimeȱ ofȱprinting. Inȱthisȱcase,ȱtheȱtrayȱisȱprintedȱwithȱeitherȱoneȱorȱtwoȱsubstituteȱ materialsȱ(dependingȱonȱtheȱmaterialsȱinstalledȱinȱtheȱprinterȱatȱtheȱ timeȱofȱprinting).ȱIfȱpossible,ȱHighȱSpeedȱmodeȱisȱused. • Inȱadditionȱtoȱtheȱmaterialȱyouȱselected,ȱthereȱisȱanotherȱ(similar)ȱ materialȱinstalledȱinȱtheȱprinterȱatȱtheȱtimeȱofȱprinting. Inȱthisȱcase,ȱHighȱSpeedȱmodeȱisȱused,ȱbyȱprintingȱwithȱaȱmixtureȱofȱ theȱtwoȱmaterialsȱ(asȱifȱtheyȱwereȱtheȱsameȱmaterial). DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–49 Using Objet Studio 4. ClickȱBuild. Ifȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱfileȱhasȱnotȱbeenȱsaved,ȱtheȱSaveȱAsȱdialogȱboxȱopensȱforȱ youȱtoȱsaveȱitȱnow. ObjetȱStudioȱchecksȱifȱthereȱisȱaȱproblemȱwithȱtheȱpositioningȱofȱobjectsȱ onȱtheȱtray.ȱIfȱso,ȱtheȱaffectedȱobjectsȱareȱdisplayedȱwithȱspecialȱcolorsȱ (seeȱ“TrayȱValidation”ȱonȱpage 45),ȱandȱaȱwarningȱmessageȱappears. Figure 5-72: Tray validation warning message • ToȱcancelȱtheȱBuildȱcommandȱsoȱyouȱcanȱcorrectȱtheȱproblem,ȱclickȱ No. • Toȱprintȱtheȱmodelsȱasȱtheyȱareȱpositionedȱonȱtheȱtray,ȱclickȱYes. TheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱopens,ȱsoȱyouȱcanȱmonitorȱtheȱprogressȱofȱyourȱ trays—before,ȱduring,ȱandȱafterȱprinting.ȱSeeȱ“Monitoringȱandȱ ManagingȱPrintȱJobs”ȱonȱpage 68. 5–50 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Applying Additional Objet Studio Features Dividing Objects YouȱcanȱuseȱtheȱSplitȱObjectȱfeatureȱtoȱproduceȱobjectsȱlargerȱthanȱtheȱtrayȱ areaȱbyȱdividingȱtheȱmodelȱintoȱseparateȱparts.ȱWithȱthisȱfeature,ȱyouȱ produceȱonlyȱaȱspecificȱsectionȱofȱaȱmodel. To split an object: 1. Selectȱtheȱobject. 2. FromȱtheȱObjectȱmenu,ȱselectȱSplit. 3. InȱtheȱSplitȱObjectȱdialogȱbox,ȱenterȱtheȱvaluesȱtoȱdetermineȱhowȱObjetȱ Studioȱwillȱdivideȱtheȱobject.ȱYouȱcanȱdivideȱanȱobjectȱalongȱanyȱofȱitsȱ axes,ȱbyȱenteringȱeitherȱexactȱmeasurementsȱorȱtheȱnumberȱofȱparts. Figure 5-73: Split Object dialog box 4. InȱSaveȱtoȱFolder,ȱenterȱtheȱfolderȱname. 5. ClickȱOK. Theȱcompositeȱpartsȱareȱsavedȱasȱnewȱstlȱfilesȱwithȱ“Partȱ1,”ȱ“Partȱ2,”ȱ etc.,ȱaddedȱtoȱtheȱoriginalȱfileȱname. Note: Before printing the newly created stl files, it is recommended that you check them for defects in an STL-repair application, such as Magics™, by Materialise®. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–51 Using Objet Studio Choosing the Support Strength Whenȱproducingȱmodels,ȱsupportȱmaterialȱfillsȱsomeȱhollowȱandȱemptyȱ sectionsȱ(seeȱ“ModelȱOrientation”ȱonȱpage 26).ȱObjetȱStudioȱallowsȱyouȱtoȱ adjustȱtheȱstrengthȱofȱtheȱstructureȱformedȱwithȱtheȱsupportȱmaterial.ȱThisȱ adjustmentȱisȱusefulȱwhenȱproducingȱeitherȱlarge/massiveȱmodelsȱorȱsmall/ delicateȱmodels.ȱForȱmostȱpurposes,ȱtheȱdefaultȱsettingȱprovidesȱadequateȱ supportȱstrength. To change the strength of the support structure used when printing a model: 1. Selectȱaȱmodelȱonȱtheȱtray. 2. OnȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱOptionsȱgroup,ȱclickȱ or— • OnȱtheȱModelȱToolbar,ȱclickȱ or— • FromȱtheȱrightȬclickȱcontextȱmenu,ȱselectȱAdvanced Properties. TheȱAdvancedȱPropertiesȱdialogȱboxȱopens. Figure 5-74: Advanced Properties dialog box 3. InȱtheȱGridȱStyleȱsection,ȱchooseȱtheȱsupportȱstrengthȱsuitableȱforȱtheȱ selectedȱmodel.ȱYouȱcanȱselectȱaȱdifferentȱsupportȱstrengthȱforȱeachȱ modelȱonȱtheȱtray. • Standard—forȱmodelsȱneedingȱaverageȱsupportȱ(mostȱmodels). • Heavy—forȱlargeȱmodelsȱneedingȱmuchȱsupport. • Lite—forȱdelicateȱmodelsȱneedingȱlittleȱsupport.ȱ(Thisȱsettingȱmakesȱ itȱeasyȱtoȱremoveȱtheȱsupportȱmaterial.) Note: If an object is split into shells, the Advanced Properties enabled vary with the object selection. If a single element is selected only Hollow is enabled. If a group of elements is selected only Grid Style is enabled. 4. ClickȱApply. 5–52 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide “Hollow”— Filling Models with Support Material Manyȱobjectsȱplacedȱonȱtheȱtrayȱfromȱstlȱfilesȱareȱ“solid.”ȱThisȱmeansȱthat,ȱ whenȱprinted,ȱtheȱmodelȱwillȱbeȱcompletelyȱfilledȱwithȱmodelȱmaterial.ȱ Often,ȱespeciallyȱwithȱlargeȱobjects,ȱthisȱisȱunnecessary.ȱInstead,ȱtheȱmodelȱ canȱbeȱfilledȱwithȱsupportȱmaterial,ȱwhichȱisȱlessȱcostly.ȱItȱisȱalsoȱadvisableȱ toȱfillȱmodelsȱwithȱsupportȱmaterialȱwhenȱpreparingȱthemȱforȱinvestmentȱ casting,ȱsinceȱthisȱmaterialȱburnsȱoffȱmoreȱquicklyȱduringȱtheȱprocessȱofȱ makingȱtheȱcast. ObjetȱStudioȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱprintȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱtrayȱwithȱanȱouterȱshellȱofȱ modelȱmaterialȱandȱaȱcenterȱfilledȱwithȱsupportȱmaterial.ȱWhenȱusingȱthisȱ feature,ȱcalledȱ“Hollow,”ȱtheȱthicknessȱofȱtheȱshellȱshouldȱbeȱnoȱlessȱthanȱ 0.5ȱmillimeters. To use the Hollow feature: 1. Selectȱaȱmodelȱonȱtheȱtray. or— • OnȱtheȱModelȱToolbar,ȱclickȱ or— • FromȱtheȱrightȬclickȱcontextȱmenu,ȱselectȱAdvanced Properties. TheȱAdvancedȱPropertiesȱdialogȱboxȱopens. 2. SelectȱHollow. Figure 5-75: Advanced Properties dialog box 3. Setȱtheȱshellȱthickness,ȱinȱmillimeters. 4. ClickȱApply. Note: There is no change in the display of objects in Objet Studio when Hollow is selected. To inspect, change or cancel the Hollow setting: 1. Selectȱaȱmodelȱonȱtheȱtray. 2. AccessȱtheȱAdvancedȱPropertiesȱdialogȱbox,ȱasȱabove. 3. IfȱyouȱchangeȱorȱcancelȱtheȱHollowȱsetting,ȱclickȱApply. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–53 Using Objet Studio Displaying the Cross Section of Objects TheȱSectionȱfeatureȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱviewȱtheȱinteriorȱofȱanȱobjectȱbyȱ“slicing”ȱ itȱonȱanyȱaxis.ȱYouȱcanȱthenȱmanipulateȱtheȱobjectȱtoȱinspectȱtheȱinteriorȱ fromȱdifferentȱangles.ȱThisȱmayȱbeȱimportantȱforȱdecidingȱonȱtheȱtypeȱofȱ supportȱnecessaryȱwhenȱproducingȱtheȱmodelȱ(seeȱ“ChoosingȱtheȱSupportȱ Strength”ȱonȱpage 52).ȱDisplayingȱanȱobject’sȱcrossȱsectionȱonlyȱaffectsȱhowȱ theȱtrayȱisȱdisplayedȱonȱtheȱscreen;ȱitȱdoesȱnotȱchangeȱtheȱobjectȱitself. To display a cross section of the tray: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱSection. TheȱSectionȱdialogȱboxȱopens. Figure 5-76: Section dialog box 2. SelectȱEnable Clipping. 3. UseȱtheȱsliderȱcontrolsȱforȱtheȱXȬ,ȱYȬ,ȱandȱZȬaxesȱtoȱcutȱtheȱtrayȱsoȱthatȱ youȱseeȱtheȱcrossȱsectionȱyouȱwant. Figure 5-77: Whole view 5–54 Figure 5-78: Cross-section view, after using the Z-slider DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Saving the Screen Display as an I mage File Youȱcanȱsaveȱtheȱimageȱdisplayedȱinȱtheȱactiveȱviewingȱscreenȱasȱaȱgraphicȱ file. To save the screen display as an image: 1. PressȱCtrl+B. or—ȱ FromȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱselectȱSave Bitmap. TheȱSaveȱBitmapȱdialogȱboxȱopens. Figure 5-79: Save Bitmap dialog box 2. Atȱtheȱtopȱofȱtheȱdialogȱbox,ȱselectȱtheȱappropriateȱfolder. 3. Atȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱdialogȱbox,ȱenterȱaȱfileȱname. 4. OpenȱtheȱSaveȱasȱtypeȱdropȬdownȱlist,ȱandȱselectȱtheȱfileȱformat. 5. ClickȱSave. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–55 Using Objet Studio Exporting and I mporting Objet Build Trays WhenȱyouȱsaveȱbuildȱtraysȱinȱObjetȱStudio,ȱtheyȱareȱsavedȱasȱobjtfȱfiles.ȱ TheseȱfilesȱcontainȱinstructionsȱtoȱObjetȱStudioȱandȱtoȱStratasysȱprintersȱforȱ displayingȱandȱproducingȱtheȱstlȱfilesȱusedȱonȱtheȱtray.ȱToȱconvenientlyȱ saveȱallȱofȱtheȱfilesȱasȱtheyȱareȱpositionedȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱforȱstoringȱtheȱ job,ȱorȱforȱtransferringȱitȱtoȱanotherȱlocation,ȱObjetȱStudioȱcompressesȱthemȱ intoȱoneȱobjzfȱfile.ȱToȱlaterȱuseȱtheȱobjzfȱfile,ȱtheȱfileȱmustȱfirstȱbeȱexpandedȱ inȱObjetȱStudioȱandȱitsȱcomponentȱfilesȱsaved. Note: If you export an objzf file containing a stl file originally saved as readonly, you cannot open (import) this objzf file to the folder where the read-only stl file is saved. To create an objzf file: 1. FromȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱselectȱExport Packed Job. TheȱSaveȱAsȱdialogȱboxȱopens. 2. Selectȱtheȱappropriateȱfolderȱandȱchangeȱtheȱfileȱnameȱ(ifȱnecessary). 3. ClickȱSave. To open an objzf file: ¾ DoubleȬclickȱonȱtheȱobjtfȱfile. or— 1. FromȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱselectȱImport Packed Job. 2. InȱtheȱOpenȱdialogȱbox,ȱdisplayȱtheȱappropriateȱfolderȱandȱselectȱtheȱ file. 3. InȱtheȱBrowseȱforȱFolderȱdialogȱbox,ȱdisplayȱtheȱfolderȱinȱwhichȱyouȱ wantȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱexpandȱtheȱcompressedȱfile,ȱandȱclickȱOK. Theȱobjtfȱfileȱandȱassociatedȱstlȱfilesȱareȱexpandedȱandȱplacedȱinȱtheȱ selectedȱfolder,ȱandȱtheȱtrayȱisȱdisplayedȱinȱObjetȱStudio. Note: You can also export a print job as an objzf file from the Job Manager screen—see “Exporting Jobs (objzf)” on page 80. 5–56 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Customizing Objet Studio YouȱcanȱcustomizeȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱsuitȱyourȱparticularȱworkingȱneedsȱandȱ preferences.ȱFeaturesȱthatȱyouȱcanȱcustomizeȱinclude: • • • • • Creating a Quick Access Toolbar CreatingȱaȱquickȬaccessȱtoolbarȱforȱfrequentlyȱusedȱcommands. ChangingȱtheȱpositionȱofȱtheȱQuickȱAccessȱtoolbar. Minimizingȱtheȱribbon. ChangingȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱcolorȱtheme. Configuringȱdefaultȱsettingsȱforȱobjectsȱplacedȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. AsȱyouȱworkȱwithȱObjetȱStudio,ȱyouȱmayȱuseȱcertainȱcommandsȱfrequently.ȱ YouȱcanȱcreateȱaȱquickȬaccessȱtoolbarȱtoȱmakeȱyourȱworkȱeasier.ȱ To create a quick-access toolbar: 1. Aboveȱtheȱribbonȱtabs,ȱclickȱ TheȱCustomizeȱQuickȱAccessȱToolbarȱmenuȱopens. Figure 5-80: Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu 2. Selectȱaȱcommandȱyouȱwantȱtoȱaddȱtoȱtheȱtoolbar. Anȱiconȱforȱtheȱselectedȱcommandȱisȱaddedȱtoȱtheȱtoolbar.ȱ Figure 5-81: Quick Access toolbar Toȱaddȱanotherȱcommand,ȱrepeatȱtheȱaboveȱprocedure. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–57 Using Objet Studio 3. Toȱchooseȱfromȱaȱwiderȱrangeȱofȱcommands: • FromȱtheȱCustomizeȱQuickȱAccessȱToolbarȱmenuȱ(seeȱfigure 5Ȭ80ȱonȱ page 57),ȱselectȱMore Commands. or— • RightȬclickȱonȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱiconȱ ,ȱorȱelsewhereȱ onȱtheȱribbon,ȱandȱselectȱCustomize Quick Access Toolbar. Figure 5-82: Right-click ribbon menu TheȱOptionsȱdialogȱboxȱopens. Figure 5-83: Quick Access Toobar Options dialog box 4. OpenȱtheȱdropȬdownȱlistȱandȱselectȱeitherȱPopular Commandsȱorȱ Commands not on the Ribbon.ȱ 5. SelectȱaȱcommandȱandȱclickȱAdd. 6. ClickȱOK. Hiding the Ribbon Toȱmakeȱmoreȱroomȱforȱdisplayingȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱyouȱcanȱhideȱtheȱObjetȱ Studioȱribbons. To hide the ribbons: 1. RightȬclickȱanywhereȱonȱtheȱribbonȱorȱonȱtheȱmenuȱbar,ȱorȱinȱtheȱObjetȱ StudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ 2. SelectȱMinimize the Ribbon. Theȱribbonsȱdisappear,ȱbutȱyouȱcanȱtemporarilyȱdisplayȱtheȱribbonȱ iconsȱbyȱclickingȱTray Settings orȱJob Managerȱonȱtheȱmenuȱbar.ȱWhenȱ youȱnextȱclickȱoutsideȱofȱtheȱribbon,ȱitȱdisappearsȱagain. To return the permanent ribbon display: ¾ RepeatȱtheȱstepsȱaboveȱtoȱcancelȱMinimizeȱtheȱRibbon. 5–58 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Display Colors YouȱcanȱcustomizeȱsomeȱofȱtheȱcolorsȱusedȱforȱdisplayingȱObjetȱStudioȱ screensȱandȱforȱdisplayingȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. To change the colors used in Objet Studio screens: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions. Figure 5-84: Display settings 2. InȱtheȱAppearanceȱtabȱofȱtheȱOptionsȱdialogȱbox,ȱyouȱcanȱconfigureȱtheȱ display. • TheȱModeȱselectionȱdeterminesȱhowȱmodelsȱappearȱonȱtheȱbuildȱ tray.ȱTheȱdefaultȱmethodȱforȱdisplayingȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱ asȱsolidȱ(“shaded”)ȱobjects.ȱTheȱotherȱoptionsȱareȱWireFrameȱandȱ Points. • IfȱShadedȱisȱselected,ȱyouȱcanȱdisplayȱtheȱmodelȱonȱtheȱtrayȱasȱaȱseeȬ throughȱobject. Figure 5-85: Transparent display • DoubleȬclickȱtheȱcolorȱpatchesȱtoȱcustomizeȱcolors. • TheȱWindowsȱBackgroundȱColorȱsettingsȱenableȱyouȱtoȱchangeȱtheȱ colorȱbehindȱtheȱbuildȱtray—withȱeitherȱaȱsolidȱorȱaȱtwoȬcolorȱ gradient. • Toȱreturnȱtoȱtheȱdefaultȱdisplayȱsettings,ȱclickȱDefault. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–59 Using Objet Studio Changing Color Themes ObjetȱStudioȱoffersȱaȱchoiceȱofȱfourȱbackgroundȱcolorȱthemes—blue,ȱblack,ȱ silverȱandȱaqua.ȱ Figure 5-86: Background color themes To change the color theme: ¾ FromȱtheȱStyleȱmenu,ȱselectȱoneȱofȱtheȱoptions. Keyboard Shortcuts Youȱcanȱdefineȱshortcutȱkeysȱforȱfrequentlyȱusedȱcommands. To define shortcut keys: 1. Aboveȱtheȱribbonȱtabs,ȱclickȱ TheȱCustomizeȱQuickȱAccessȱToolbarȱmenuȱopens. Figure 5-87: Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu 2. SelectȱMore Commands. TheȱOptionsȱdialogȱboxȱopensȱ(seeȱfigure 5Ȭ83ȱonȱpage 58). 5–60 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 3. ClickȱCustomize. TheȱCustomizeȱKeyboardȱdialogȱboxȱappears. Figure 5-88: Customize Keyboard dialog box 4. SelectȱcommandȱCategoriesȱtoȱdisplayȱallȱtheȱcommandsȱinȱthatȱ category,ȱforȱexample,ȱallȱtheȱModelȱSettingsȱcommands.ȱ Currentȱshortcutȱkeysȱareȱdisplayed. 5. Enterȱtheȱshortcutȱkeyȱinȱthe Pressȱnewȱshortcutȱkeyȱfield,ȱandȱclickȱ Assign. 6. Ifȱyouȱwantȱtoȱredefineȱallȱshortcutȱkeys,ȱclickȱReset All. Setting User Preferences YouȱcanȱchangeȱseveralȱObjetȱStudioȱsettingsȱthatȱaffectȱobjectsȱplacedȱonȱ theȱbuildȱtray. To change default settings: ¾ FromȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱselectȱUser Preferences. Figure 5-89: Setting work preferences • BuildingȱStyle—seeȱ“SurfaceȱFinish”ȱonȱpage 23. • GridȱStyle—seeȱ“UsingȱaȱGridȱtoȱPositionȱObjects”ȱonȱpage 30. • ApplicationȱSettings—seeȱ“ChoosingȱtheȱSupportȱStrength”ȱonȱpage 52,ȱ andȱ“FreezingȱModelȱOrientation”ȱonȱpage 37. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–61 Using Objet Studio Professional Mode Features SomeȱadvancedȱfeaturesȱofȱObjetȱStudioȱareȱonlyȱaccessibleȱinȱProfessionalȱ Mode.ȱ To see the current Objet Studio setting: ¾ OpenȱtheȱToolsȱmenu. Figure 5-90: Tools menu, showing Professional Mode selected IfȱProfessionalȱModeȱisȱselected,ȱadvancedȱfeaturesȱareȱdisplayed.ȱ To change the Professional Mode setting: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱProfessional Mode. Theȱfollowingȱmessageȱisȱdisplayed,ȱremindingȱyouȱthatȱtheȱchangeȱ willȱonlyȱtakeȱeffectȱtheȱnextȱtimeȱyouȱopenȱObjetȱStudio—evenȱthoughȱ theȱcheckȱmarkȱnextȱtoȱtheȱProfessionalȱModeȱoptionȱappearsȱ immediately. Figure 5-91: Configuration-change message 2. CloseȱandȱreȬopenȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱuseȱtheȱProfessionalȱModeȱfeatures. 5–62 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Default Settings YouȱcanȱcontrolȱtheȱdefaultȱsettingsȱofȱseveralȱObjetȱStudioȱfeaturesȱfromȱ theȱAdvancedȱtabȱofȱtheȱOptionsȱdialogȱbox. To display the Options dialog box ¾ FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions. or— InȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱclickȱOptions. Figure 5-92: Options dialog box, Advanced tab Automatic Orientation Byȱdefault,ȱwhenȱObjetȱStudioȱplacesȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱitȱorientsȱ themȱoptimally,ȱforȱtheȱshortestȱprintingȱtime.ȱIfȱnecessary,ȱyouȱcanȱchooseȱ toȱcancelȱautomaticȱorientationȱeachȱtimeȱyouȱplaceȱanȱobjectȱonȱtheȱbuildȱ trayȱ(seeȱ“AutomaticȱOrientation”ȱonȱpage 25).ȱInȱanyȱcase,ȱwhenȱobjectsȱ areȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱyouȱcanȱchangeȱtheirȱorientationȱmanuallyȱ(seeȱ “ModelȱOrientation”ȱonȱpage 26.)ȱ To change the default setting so that Automatic Orientation is disabled: ¾ InȱtheȱAdvancedȱsectionȱofȱtheȱOptionsȱdialogȱbox,ȱclearȱtheȱcheckȱbox. Automatic Zoom WhenȱAutoȱZoomȱisȱselectedȱinȱtheȱAdvancedȱsectionȱofȱtheȱOptionsȱdialogȱ box,ȱtheȱdisplayȱzoomsȱin,ȱtoȱdisplayȱtheȱobjectsȱplacedȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱ Thisȱallowsȱyouȱtoȱcarefullyȱinspectȱandȱmanipulateȱtheȱobjects. Byȱdefault,ȱthisȱfeatureȱisȱnotȱenabled.ȱInȱanyȱcase,ȱyouȱcanȱchangeȱtheȱ zoomȱlevel,ȱasȱnecessaryȱ(seeȱ“ZoomȱOptions”ȱonȱpage 44). DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–63 Using Objet Studio OpenGL Driver Configuration TheȱOpenGLȱdriverȱdisplaysȱ3Dȱgraphicsȱonȱyourȱscreen.ȱThereȱisȱnormallyȱ noȱreasonȱtoȱadjustȱitsȱsettings.ȱIfȱyouȱsuspectȱaȱproblemȱwithȱtheȱwayȱObjetȱ Studioȱdisplaysȱobjects,ȱyouȱcanȱuseȱtheȱOpenGLȱDriverȱConfigurationȱtoolȱ toȱcheckȱandȱconfigureȱtheȱdriverȱsettings.ȱ To access the OpenGL Driver Configuration dialog box: 1. FromȱtheȱToolsȱmenu,ȱselectȱOptions. or— InȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱCommandsȱmenuȱ ,ȱclickȱOptions. 2. InȱtheȱOptionsȱdialogȱbox,ȱdisplayȱtheȱTroubleshootingȱtab.ȱ Figure 5-93: Access to OpenGL Driver configuration The Troubleshooting tab is only accessible when Professional Mode is active (see “Professional Mode Features” on page 62). 3. ClickȱOpenGL Driver Configuration. TheȱdialogȱboxȱthatȱopensȱdisplaysȱdetailsȱofȱtheȱpixelȱformatȱIDȱ(index)ȱ forȱtheȱwindowȱandȱtheȱmemory. Figure 5-94: OpenGL Driver Configuration dialog box Ifȱyouȱwantȱtoȱdisplayȱtheȱvaluesȱandȱchangeȱthem,ȱclickȱ .ȱAlternately,ȱ youȱcanȱselectȱChoose Formatȱandȱchangeȱtheȱvaluesȱinȱthisȱdialogȱbox. 5–64 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide To perform a test of the driver configuration and enter the suggested pixel format ID: 1. SelectȱChoose Format.ȱ 2. ClickȱTest. ObjetȱStudioȱreturnsȱtheȱrecommendedȱpixelȱformatȱID. Figure 5-95: Recommended pixel format ID 3. ClickȱOK.ȱ 4. InȱtheȱOpenGLȱDriverȱConfigurationȱdialogȱboxȱ(figure 5Ȭ94),ȱselectȱPixel Format IDȱandȱenterȱthisȱnumber. 5. ClickȱApply. 6. Displayȱtheȱotherȱpixelȱformatȱtab,ȱandȱrepeatȱthisȱprocedure. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–65 Using Objet Studio Getting Additional Objet Studio Assistance ObjetȱStudioȱHelpȱprovidesȱonȬscreenȱinstructionsȱandȱinformation,ȱasȱyouȱ work. To view Objet Studio Help: ¾ Onȱtheȱstandardȱtoolbar,ȱclickȱ ȱandȱthenȱclickȱObjet Studio Help. Figure 5-96: Help options Youȱcanȱalsoȱviewȱinformationȱonȱtheȱfollowingȱsubjects: • Troubleshootingȱopensȱaȱlistȱofȱerrorȱmessagesȱandȱtheirȱ explanations. • CheckȱforȱUpdatesȱchecksȱifȱyouȱareȱusingȱtheȱlatestȱObjetȱStudioȱ version.ȱ Objet Studio Version, Material Module and Licensed Features YouȱcanȱviewȱdetailsȱofȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱversion,ȱtheȱmaterialȱmoduleȱ installed,ȱandȱtheȱfeaturesȱavailableȱwithȱyourȱlicense. To view details of your Objet Studio installation: ¾ Onȱtheȱstandardȱtoolbar,ȱclickȱ ȱandȱthenȱclickȱAbout.... Figure 5-97: Displaying Objet Studio details About Objet Studio tab TheȱAboutȱObjetȱStudioȱtabȱshowsȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱversionȱnumberȱandȱ basicȱinformationȱaboutȱyourȱcomputer. Figure 5-98: About Objet Studio tab 5–66 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Materials Module tab TheȱMaterialsȱModuleȱtabȱshowsȱdetailsȱofȱtheȱmaterialȱmoduleȱinstalled. Figure 5-99: Materials Module tab • Moduleȱversion IfȱaȱMaterialsȱModuleȱupgradeȱ(patch)ȱwasȱinstalled,ȱtheȱnewȱMaterialsȱ Moduleȱversionȱisȱdisplayed.ȱIfȱnoȱpatchesȱwereȱinstalled,ȱtheȱModuleȱ versionȱisȱtheȱsameȱasȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱversion. • Moduleȱdate IfȱaȱMaterialsȱModuleȱupgradeȱ(patch)ȱwasȱinstalled,ȱtheȱdateȱofȱitsȱ creationȱisȱdisplayed.ȱIfȱnoȱpatchesȱwereȱinstalled,ȱtheȱModuleȱdateȱisȱtheȱ dateȱofȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱversion. • Moduleȱproperties IfȱaȱMaterialsȱModuleȱupgradeȱ(patch)ȱwasȱinstalled,ȱitsȱdescriptionȱisȱ displayed.ȱIfȱnoȱpatchesȱwereȱinstalled,ȱ“Default”ȱisȱdisplayed. Feature License tab TheȱFeatureȱLicenseȱtabȱshowsȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱfeaturesȱavailableȱwithȱyourȱ license. Figure 5-100: Feature License tab Clickȱ ȱtoȱexpandȱtheȱdetailsȱforȱeachȱfeature. • Modesȱshowsȱtheȱprintingȱmodesȱavailable. Seeȱ“PrintingȱModes”ȱonȱpage 47.ȱ • Materialsȱshowsȱbasicȱmodelȱmaterialsȱavailable. • MixedȱTrayȱshowsȱifȱyourȱlicenseȱenablesȱprintingȱaȱbuildȱtrayȱ containingȱobjects,ȱusingȱaȱdifferentȱmodelȱmaterialȱforȱeach. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–67 Using Objet Studio Monitoring and Managing Print Jobs InȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱofȱObjetȱStudio,ȱyouȱmonitorȱandȱmanageȱjobsȱ sentȱtoȱtheȱprinter.ȱThereȱareȱaȱfewȱdifferencesȱbetweenȱObjetȱStudioȱonȱ clientȱworkstationsȱandȱonȱtheȱcomputerȱconnectedȱdirectlyȱtoȱtheȱ3Dȱ printer—theȱserverȱworkstation. • ObjetȱStudioȱinstalledȱonȱaȱclientȱcomputerȱonlyȱdisplaysȱtheȱqueueȱandȱ statusȱforȱjobsȱsentȱtoȱtheȱ3Dȱprinterȱserverȱfromȱthatȱcomputer,ȱandȱitȱ allowsȱtheȱuserȱtoȱeditȱonlyȱtheseȱjobs.ȱ Note: If there are several Objet printers on the local network, client computers can connect to any of them, but only one at a time. • ObjetȱStudioȱinstalledȱonȱtheȱcomputerȱdirectlyȱconnectedȱtoȱaȱspecificȱ 3Dȱprinterȱ(server),ȱdisplaysȱtheȱqueueȱandȱstatusȱforȱallȱjobsȱsentȱtoȱthatȱ 3Dȱprinterȱbyȱtheȱserverȱandȱbyȱallȱclientȱcomputersȱonȱtheȱnetwork.ȱItȱ alsoȱallowsȱeditingȱandȱmanipulationȱofȱallȱjobs,ȱandȱenablesȱreȬsendingȱ previouslyȬprintedȱjobsȱtoȱtheȱprinter. If Objet Studio is not connected to a printer (or printer server), you can prepare tray files for any Objet printer. Later, these files can be used by Objet Studio on the appropriate printer server. Job Manager Screen TheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱonȱtheȱclientȱandȱserverȱworkstationsȱlooksȱ identical.ȱTheȱonlyȱdifferenceȱisȱthatȱoptionsȱonlyȱrelevantȱtoȱtheȱserverȱ workstationȱareȱdisabledȱforȱclientȱinstallations. Figure 5-101: Job Manager screen TheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱisȱdividedȱintoȱpanels: • • • • • • • 5–68 JobsȱQueue PrintingȱProgress History AvailableȱResources MaterialȱConsumption TrayȱPreview Waste DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Jobs Queue Onȱtheȱserver,ȱtheȱJobsȱQueueȱlistsȱtheȱlastȱ15ȱjobsȱsentȱfromȱclientȱcomputers.ȱ Onȱclientȱworkstations,ȱtheȱJobsȱQueueȱlistsȱjobsȱsentȱfromȱthatȱcomputerȱtoȱ theȱprinterȱserver.ȱ Informationȱforȱeachȱofȱtheȱqueuedȱjobsȱisȱdisplayed,ȱincludingȱtheȱjobȱstatus. Status Meaning Waiting Printingȱofȱthisȱjobȱhasȱnotȱstarted. Building Printingȱofȱthisȱjobȱisȱinȱprogress. Stopped Printingȱofȱthisȱjobȱwasȱinterrupted.ȱPrintingȱcanȱlaterȱbeȱ continuedȱ(Resume)ȱorȱbegunȱagainȱ(Restart). Error Errorsȱoccurredȱduringȱtheȱprintingȱofȱthisȱjob,ȱandȱitȱwasȱ placedȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueueȱagain. Editing ThisȱjobȱisȱnowȱbeingȱeditedȱinȱObjetȱStudio. Spooling Theȱjobȱfileȱisȱbeingȱspooledȱinȱtheȱprinter. Preprocessing Theȱ3Dȱprinterȱisȱreadyingȱitselfȱforȱprinting:ȱtheȱcoverȱ locks,ȱprintȱheadsȱwarmȱupȱandȱareȱputȱinȱstartingȱposition,ȱ UVȱlampsȱareȱturnedȱon,ȱandȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱlevelȱisȱ adjusted. OnȱSchedule Theȱjobȱisȱscheduledȱtoȱbeȱprintedȱatȱaȱspecifiedȱtime. Inȱaddition,ȱtheȱfollowingȱinformationȱisȱdisplayed: • Owner—theȱcomputerȱthatȱsentȱtheȱjob • BuildȱTime—theȱestimatedȱbuildingȱtimeȱforȱtheȱjob • ModelȱConsumption—theȱamountȱofȱmodelȱmaterialȱrequiredȱtoȱ completeȱtheȱjob,ȱandȱtheȱamountȱactuallyȱusedȱtillȱnow • SupportȱConsumption—theȱamountȱofȱsupportȱmaterialȱrequiredȱtoȱ completeȱtheȱjob,ȱandȱtheȱamountȱactuallyȱusedȱtillȱnow • PrintingȱMode—HS=HighȱSpeed,ȱHQ=HighȱQuality,ȱDM=Digitalȱ Material Printing Progress TheȱTimeȱpanelȱshowsȱprintingȱtimesȱandȱtheȱnumberȱofȱslicesȱsentȱtoȱtheȱprinter. History TheȱHistoryȱpanelȱshowsȱinformationȱforȱtheȱlastȱ50ȱjobsȱandȱtheirȱfinalȱ status.ȱYouȱcanȱdragȱaȱjobȱfromȱHistoryȱtoȱJobsȱQueueȱtoȱprintȱtheȱtrayȱagain. Available Resources TheȱAvailableȱResourcesȱpanelȱcontainsȱgraphicȱindicatorsȱthatȱshowȱtheȱ amountȱofȱavailableȱprintingȱmaterialsȱremainingȱinȱtheȱprinter.*ȱ Material Consumption • Actual—theȱamountȱofȱmaterialȱusedȱtillȱnow • Required—theȱamountȱofȱmaterialȱstillȱneededȱtoȱfinishȱtheȱjob Tray Preview TheȱTrayȱPreviewȱpanelȱdisplaysȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱviewȱofȱtheȱjobȱselectedȱinȱtheȱ JobȱQueueȱorȱtheȱHistoryȱlist.ȱ Onȱaȱserver,ȱyouȱcanȱopenȱanȱenlargedȱpreviewȱwindowȱbyȱclickingȱonȱtheȱ TrayȱPreviewȱdisplayȱ(seeȱ“ExtendedȱTrayȱPreview”ȱonȱpage 78). Waste IfȱyouȱmoveȱtheȱmouseȱoverȱtheȱWasteȱdisplay,ȱtheȱamountȱofȱwasteȱinȱtheȱ containerȱisȱdisplayed. * ObjetȱStudioȱdisplaysȱtheȱweightȱofȱtheȱprintingȱmaterialsȱinȱbothȱcartridgesȱ asȱlongȱasȱeachȱcartridgeȱcontainsȱmoreȱthanȱ100ȱgramsȱofȱmaterial.ȱTheȱ weightȱunderȱ100ȱgramsȱisȱnotȱcalculatedȱandȱdisplayed.ȱHowever,ȱifȱaȱ cartridgeȱcontainsȱlessȱthanȱ100ȱgramsȱofȱmaterial,ȱtheȱprinterȱusesȱit—asȱ longȱasȱtheȱmaterialȱinȱtheȱotherȱcartridgeȱweighsȱmoreȱthanȱ100ȱgrams.ȱInȱ anyȱcase,ȱtheȱweightȱofȱeachȱcartridgeȱisȱdisplayedȱinȱtheȱprinterȱapplication. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–69 Using Objet Studio Setting the Printer Connection WhenȱanȱObjetȱ3Dȱprinterȱisȱinstalled,ȱtheȱserverȱcomputerȱisȱconnectedȱtoȱ thatȱprinter.ȱNormally,ȱthereȱshouldȱbeȱnoȱreasonȱtoȱchangeȱthisȱconnection.ȱ Occasionally,ȱhowever,ȱyouȱmayȱneedȱtoȱresetȱtheȱconnection,ȱtoȱconnectȱ theȱserverȱtoȱanotherȱprinter,ȱorȱtoȱuseȱObjetȱStudioȱinȱoffȬlineȱmodeȱ (withoutȱaȱprinterȱconnection). To set (or change) the printer connection: 1. OnȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱ3DȱPrinterȱgroup,ȱclickȱ 2. InȱtheȱSetȱPrinterȱdialogȱbox,ȱclickȱConnect. Figure 5-102: Connecting to a printer (A) 3. EnterȱtheȱcomputerȱnameȱorȱitsȱIPȱaddress,ȱorȱclickȱBrowseȱtoȱfindȱandȱ selectȱit. Figure 5-103: Connecting to a printer (B) 4. ClickȱOK. Whenȱtheȱconnectionȱisȱestablished,ȱObjetȱStudioȱisȱconfiguredȱtoȱ prepareȱprintȱjobsȱforȱthatȱprinter. If you can see the material levels in the Job Manager screen (see figure 5-101 on page 68), Objet Studio is connected to the printer. 5–70 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Off-line Mode YouȱcanȱuseȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱprepareȱtraysȱforȱprintingȱinȱoffȬlineȱmode,ȱonȱ aȱremoteȱcomputerȱorȱwhenȱtheȱprinterȱconnectionȱisȱnotȱavailable.ȱYouȱalsoȱ useȱoffȬlineȱmodeȱtoȱprepareȱtraysȱforȱprintingȱwithȱotherȱprinters.ȱInȱthisȱ case,ȱifȱObjetȱStudioȱisȱcurrentlyȱconnectedȱtoȱaȱprinter,ȱyouȱmustȱchangeȱtoȱ offȬlineȱmodeȱbyȱremovingȱthisȱconnection. To disconnect Objet Studio from the printer: 1. OnȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱ3DȱPrinterȱgroup,ȱclickȱ 2. InȱtheȱSetȱPrinterȱdialogȱbox,ȱclickȱConnectȱ(seeȱfigure 5Ȭ102). Figure 5-104: Disconnecting Objet Studio from a printer (A) 3. InȱtheȱPrinterȱConnectionȱdialogȱbox,ȱdeleteȱtheȱcomputerȱname/IPȱ address. Figure 5-105: Disconnecting Objet Studio from a printer (B) 4. ClickȱOK. “Unknown”ȱappearsȱinȱtheȱprinterȬnameȱfield. 5. ClickȱOK. 6. InȱtheȱpopȬupȱmessage,ȱconfirmȱthatȱyouȱwantȱtoȱworkȱinȱoffȬlineȱmodeȱ byȱclickingȱNo. Figure 5-106: Off-line message WhenȱObjetȱStudioȱisȱinȱoffȬlineȱmode,ȱyouȱcanȱconfigureȱitȱforȱpreparingȱ printȱjobsȱforȱdifferentȱprinters. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–71 Using Objet Studio To change the Objet Studio off-line configuration: 1. InȱtheȱSetȱPrinterȱdialogȱbox,ȱselectȱaȱprinterȱtype. Figure 5-107: Off-line printer selection 2. ClickȱOKȱ(notȱ“Connect”). 5–72 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Setting the Remote Printer Connection (Client Mode) WhenȱyouȱopenȱObjetȱStudioȱforȱtheȱfirstȱtimeȱinȱaȱclientȱinstallation,ȱyouȱ areȱpromptedȱtoȱconnectȱtoȱanȱObjetȱserverȱcomputerȱthatȱsendsȱjobsȱtoȱaȱ3Dȱ printer.ȱToȱdoȱthis,ȱtheȱserverȱcomputerȱmustȱbeȱoperatingȱandȱconnectedȱtoȱ theȱlocalȱnetwork.ȱ To set (or change) the connection to the server-computer: 1. OnȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱ3DȱPrinterȱgroup,ȱclickȱ 2. EnterȱtheȱnameȱofȱtheȱserverȱcomputerȱorȱitsȱIPȱaddress,ȱorȱclickȱBrowseȱ toȱfindȱandȱselectȱit. 3. ClickȱOK. Figure 5-108: Printer Server Connection dialog box Job Manager Commands TheȱJobȱManagerȱribbonȱhasȱthreeȱiconȱgroups: • 3DȱPrinter • Queue • Jobȱ Figure 5-109: Job Manager ribbon commands Iconsȱareȱenabledȱorȱdisabledȱaccordingȱtoȱtheirȱrelevancy.ȱForȱexample,ȱ sinceȱyouȱcannotȱstopȱprintingȱaȱjobȱthatȱisȱnotȱbeingȱprinted,ȱtheȱStopȱ commandȱisȱdisabledȱwhenȱtheȱprinterȱisȱidle. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–73 Using Objet Studio TheȱfollowingȱoperationsȱareȱavailableȱonȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱribbon: Group Icon Purpose 3Dȱ Printer Client:ȱSetsȱtheȱserverȱconnection.ȱSeeȱ“SettingȱtheȱRemoteȱ PrinterȱConnectionȱ(ClientȱMode)”ȱonȱpage 73. Server:ȱSetsȱtheȱprinterȱconnection.ȱSeeȱ“SettingȱtheȱPrinterȱ Connection”ȱonȱpage 70. Configuresȱoptionsȱforȱprinterȱalerts.ȱSeeȱ“ConfiguringȱUserȱ Alerts”ȱonȱpage 76. Queue Server:ȱMovesȱaȱjobȱtoȱtheȱheadȱofȱtheȱJobsȱQueue. Client:ȱDisabled. Seeȱ“JobsȱQueue”ȱonȱpage 69. Server:ȱMovesȱaȱjobȱtoȱaȱhigherȱpositionȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueue. Client:ȱDisabled. Seeȱ“JobsȱQueue”ȱonȱpage 69. Server:ȱMovesȱaȱjobȱtoȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱJobsȱQueue.ȱ Client:ȱDisabled. Seeȱ“JobsȱQueue”ȱonȱpage 69. Server:ȱMovesȱaȱjobȱtoȱaȱlowerȱpositionȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueue. Client:ȱDisabled. Seeȱ“JobsȱQueue”ȱonȱpage 69. Job Server:ȱ • ForȱaȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueue—Printsȱitȱagainȱ(fromȱtheȱ beginning).ȱ • ForȱaȱjobȱinȱtheȱHistoryȱlist—MovesȱitȱtoȱtheȱJobsȱQueueȱ forȱprinting. Client:ȱDisabled. Seeȱ“RestartingȱJobs”ȱonȱpage 79. Server:ȱStopsȱaȱjobȱinȱprogress.ȱ Client:ȱDisabled. Server:ȱContinuesȱprintingȱtheȱcurrentȱjobȱfromȱtheȱpointȱ whereȱprintingȱstopped.ȱ Client:ȱDisabled. Seeȱ“ResumingȱJobs”ȱonȱpage 79. Removesȱtheȱselectedȱjobȱfromȱtheȱqueue.ȱ RefreshesȱtheȱimageȱofȱtheȱselectedȱjobȱinȱtheȱTrayȱPreviewȱ display. OpensȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱscreenȱandȱdisplaysȱtheȱtray.ȱForȱ deletedȱjobs,ȱthisȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱmakeȱchangesȱbeforeȱ printing. 5–74 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Inȱadditionȱtoȱusingȱribbonȱcommandȱicons,ȱyouȱcanȱuseȱcommandsȱonȱ contextȱ(popȬup)ȱtoolbarsȱandȱfromȱtheȱJobȱmenuȱonȱtheȱstandardȱtoolbar.ȱ Restart Stop Delete Edit Resume Export packed job Schedule Figure 5-110: Icons on pop-up toolbar (server) Delete Edit Figure 5-111: Icons on pop-up toolbar (client workstation) Note: Most icons and menu commands are only enabled when a job is selected. When you position the cursor over an item, a tooltip displays the name of the command. Figure 5-112: Job menu options (server) DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–75 Using Objet Studio Configuring User Alerts ObjetȱStudioȱcanȱalertȱyouȱ(andȱothers)ȱtoȱtheȱstatusȱofȱjobsȱsentȱtoȱtheȱserverȱ forȱprinting.ȱThisȱisȱespeciallyȱusefulȱduringȱlongȱprintingȱjobs,ȱwhenȱtheȱ operatorȱisȱawayȱfromȱtheȱprinter.ȱTheȱfollowingȱeventsȱcanȱbeȱreported: • Theȱlevelȱofȱmodelȱorȱsupportȱmaterialȱisȱlow. • Theȱjobȱwasȱinterrupted. • Theȱjobȱwasȱcompletedȱsuccessfully. ToȱsendȱeȬmailȱandȱSMSȱalerts,ȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱeȬmailȱsoftwareȱsupportingȱ MAPIȱisȱinstalledȱonȱtheȱserverȱcomputer.ȱToȱsendȱSMSȱalerts,ȱtheȱcellularȱ phoneȱserviceȱmustȱsupportȱtheȱtransmissionȱofȱeȬmailȱmessagesȱbyȱSMS.ȱ OnlyȱtheȱsubjectȱlineȱofȱtheȱeȬmailȱmessageȱisȱtransmittedȱbyȱSMS. To configure Objet Studio to send notifications and alerts: 1. OnȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱribbon,ȱinȱtheȱ3DȱPrinterȱgroup,ȱclickȱ Figure 5-113: Notifications dialog box (server) Figure 5-114: Notifications dialog box (client workstation) 2. Setȱtheȱdesiredȱreportingȱoptions. 5–76 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 3. ClickȱDetails. Figure 5-115: Event selection for alerts 4. InȱtheȱReportsȱEventsȱdialogȱbox,ȱselectȱtheȱalertȱeventsȱandȱclickȱOK. 5. InȱtheȱNotificationsȱdialogȱbox,ȱclickȱOK. Printing the Tray IfȱthereȱisȱaȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueue,ȱitȱisȱsentȱautomaticallyȱtoȱtheȱStratasysȱ printer—asȱlongȱasȱitȱisȱon,ȱthereȱisȱaȱconnectionȱtoȱtheȱprinter,ȱandȱtheȱ printerȱisȱonȱline.ȱChapterȱ6ȱdescribesȱstartingȱandȱoperatingȱtheȱprinter.ȱ Additional Server Features ObjetȱStudioȱonȱtheȱprinterȱserverȱincludesȱtheȱfollowingȱadditionalȱ features: • • • • • • • ExtendedȱTrayȱPreview EditingȱJobs RestartingȱJobs ResumingȱJobs SchedulingȱJobs ExportingȱJobsȱ(objzf) ModifyingȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱScreen Theseȱfeaturesȱareȱdescribedȱonȱtheȱfollowingȱpages. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–77 Using Objet Studio ExtendedȱTrayȱPreview Inȱthisȱwindow,ȱyouȱcanȱviewȱtheȱtrayȱfromȱdifferentȱanglesȱandȱ magnificationsȱwithoutȱleavingȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreen.ȱInȱadditionȱtoȱ displayingȱtheȱselectedȱjobȱinȱtheȱTrayȱPreviewȱpane,ȱyouȱcanȱopenȱanȱ enlargedȱbuildȱtrayȱwindow. To display the build tray window: 1. SelectȱaȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueueȱorȱtheȱHistoryȱlist. 2. ClickȱtheȱTrayȱPreviewȱpane. Figure 5-116: Job Preview • Toȱchangeȱtheȱtrayȱmagnification,ȱturnȱtheȱmouseȱwheel.ȱ • Toȱviewȱtheȱtrayȱfromȱaȱdifferentȱperspective,ȱclickȱtheȱrelevantȱicon. • Toȱresizeȱtheȱwindow,ȱdragȱitsȱedgeȱorȱcorners. Ifȱthereȱareȱseveralȱobjectsȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱyouȱcanȱexcludeȱoneȱorȱmoreȱ fromȱbeingȱprinted,ȱwithoutȱactuallyȱdeletingȱtheȱobjectȱfromȱtheȱtrayȱfile. To prevent the printing of an object on the build tray: 1. DoubleȬclickȱonȱtheȱobjectȱyouȱdoȱnotȱwantȱtoȱprint. 2. DisplayȱtheȱBuildȱtab. 3. SelectȱExclude from Build. Figure 5-117: Excluding a model from the build 4. ClickȱYesȱtoȱconfirm. Onȱserverȱcomputers,ȱyouȱcanȱuseȱTrayȱPreviewȱtoȱdynamicallyȱdisplayȱ objectsȱasȱtheyȱareȱprinted,ȱlayerȱbyȱlayer.ȱThisȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱvisuallyȱ monitorȱprintingȱprogressȱonȱtheȱcomputerȱscreen. To display printing progress in the Tray Preview pane: ¾ FromȱtheȱJobȱmenu,ȱselectȱShow 3dProgress. This option uses additional system resources. EditingȱJobs YouȱcanȱopenȱjobsȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueueȱforȱediting. To edit a job: 1. Selectȱtheȱjob. 2. ClickȱtheȱEditȱiconȱ 5–78 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide TheȱTrayȱSettingsȱscreenȱopens,ȱdisplayingȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱTheȱstatusȱofȱ theȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱchangesȱtoȱ“Editing.” 3. Editȱtheȱjob.ȱ 4. OnȱtheȱTrayȱSettingsȱribbon,ȱclickȱ TheȱstatusȱofȱtheȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱchangesȱbackȱtoȱ “Waiting.” RestartingȱJobsȱ YouȱcanȱrestartȱjobsȱfromȱtheȱJobsȱQueueȱandȱtheȱHistoryȱlist. To restart a job: 1. Selectȱtheȱjob. 2. ClickȱtheȱRestartȱiconȱ Theȱjobȱstatusȱchangesȱtoȱ“Waiting”ȱ(inȱtheȱJobsȱQueue). ResumingȱJobsȱ Ifȱtheȱprintingȱprocessȱisȱstoppedȱorȱinterrupted,ȱyouȱmayȱbeȱableȱtoȱ continueȱprintingȱtheȱjobȱfromȱtheȱpointȱwhereȱprintingȱstopped. To resume a job: 1. Selectȱtheȱjob. 2. ClickȱtheȱResumeȱiconȱ SchedulingȱJobs Youȱcanȱscheduleȱjobsȱtoȱbeȱprintedȱatȱaȱfutureȱtime.ȱForȱexample,ȱyouȱcanȱ configureȱObjetȱStudioȱtoȱstartȱlongȱprintingȱjobsȱinȱtheȱlateȱeveningȱandȱ earlyȱmorningȱhours. To schedule a job: 1. SelectȱaȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobsȱQueue,ȱandȱclickȱ ȱonȱtheȱpopȬupȱtoolbar. 2. InȱtheȱSchedulerȱdialogȱbox,ȱsetȱtheȱStartȱDateȱandȱStartȱTimeȱforȱtheȱjob.ȱ ClickȱonȱtheȱStartȱDateȱarrowȱtoȱopenȱaȱcalendar. Figure 5-118: Scheduler with calendar displayed 3. ClickȱOK. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 5–79 Using Objet Studio ExportingȱJobsȱ(objzf ) Youȱcanȱsaveȱprintȱjobsȱasȱcompressedȱfiles. For an explanation of objzf files, see “Exporting and Importing Objet Build Trays” on page 56. Toȱexportȱaȱprintȱjob: 1. Selectȱaȱjob. 2. OnȱtheȱpopȬupȱtoolbar,ȱclickȱ 3. InȱtheȱSaveȱAsȱdialogȱbox,ȱselectȱaȱfolder. 4. ClickȱSave. ModifyingȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱScreen YouȱcanȱchangeȱtheȱsizeȱofȱtheȱsectionsȱofȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreen,ȱbyȱ draggingȱtheȱpanelȱedges.ȱThisȱappliesȱto: • theȱJobsȱQueueȱpanel • theȱTimeȱpanel • theȱHistoryȱpanel Similarly,ȱyouȱcanȱchangeȱtheȱwayȱtheȱscreenȱareaȱisȱdividedȱbetweenȱtheȱ mainȱsectionȱ(JobsȱQueue/Time/History)ȱandȱtheȱpanelsȱonȱtheȱrightȱsideȱofȱ theȱscreen. Youȱcanȱcollapseȱ(hide)ȱtheȱrightȱpanelsȱ(AvailableȱResources/Materialȱ Consumption/TrayȱView)ȱbyȱclickingȱtheȱtopȱofȱtheȱpanel. • Clickȱagainȱtoȱdisplayȱtheȱpanel. 5–80 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer StartingȱtheȱPrinter .............................................................................. 2 LoadingȱModelȱandȱSupportȱCartridges.......................................... 4 ProducingȱModels ............................................................................... 5 PreparingȱtheȱPrinter ............................................................................ 5 PrinterȱInterfaceȱColor Key.................................................................. 7 PrintingȱIndicators ................................................................................ 8 ResumingȱProductionȱAfterȱPrintingȱhasȱStopped......................... 9 ChangingȱtheȱPrintingȱMaterial ...................................................... 11 KeepingȱtheȱPrinterȱinȱIdleȱMode ................................................... 16 ShuttingȱDownȱtheȱPrinter............................................................... 17 MaintainingȱtheȱPrinter .................................................................... 19 RoutineȱMaintenanceȱSchedule......................................................... 19 UVȱLampȱCheck .................................................................................. 20 CleaningȱtheȱPrintȱHeadsȱandȱtheȱRoller ......................................... 20 CleaningȱandȱReplacingȱtheȱWiper................................................... 23 PatternȱTest........................................................................................... 25 ImprovingȱPrintȱQuality .................................................................... 26 CleaningȱtheȱRollerȱWasteȱCollectorȱandȱInspectingȱtheȱRollerȱ Scraper .................................................................................................. 27 ReplacingȱtheȱRollerȱScraper ............................................................. 30 AligningȱtheȱPrintȱHeads ................................................................... 32 Optimizingȱ(Calibrating)ȱPrintȱHeads ............................................. 35 ReplacingȱPrint Heads........................................................................ 42 TestingȱandȱCalibratingȱtheȱUVȱLamps ........................................... 53 CalibratingȱtheȱLoadȱCells ................................................................. 59 ReplacingȱtheȱOdorȱFilter................................................................... 61 ReplacingȱtheȱUVȱLamps ................................................................... 61 BuiltȬinȱTests......................................................................................... 66 ReplacingȱtheȱWasteȱContainer ......................................................... 71 CleaningȱtheȱExteriorȱPanels ............................................................. 73 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–1 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Printer cover Materials cabinet Figure 6-1: The Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Starting the Printer CAUTION! ¾ Do not attempt to operate the Stratasys printer before being trained by a Stratasys customer-support representative. ¾ Observe all safety warnings and follow the safety guidelines described in chapter 2. 1. Turnȱonȱtheȱmainȱpowerȱswitch,ȱlocatedȱatȱtheȱbackȱofȱtheȱprinter. Figure 6-2: Main power switch and cable 6–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 2. AfterȱtheȱprinterȬcontrolȱcomputerȱboots,ȱlogȱinȱtoȱWindowsȱandȱ launchȱtheȱprinterȬcontrolȱprogram: • OnȱtheȱprinterȬcomputerȱdesktop,ȱdoubleȬclickȱtheȱStratasysȱprinterȱ icon. or— • FromȱtheȱStartȱmenu,ȱselectȱ(All) Programs > Objet >Stratasys P750K. A HASP plug containing a valid product activation key is required on the printer computer. This is installed at the factory or during printer upgrade. If the application does not open and a HASP message appears, contact your dealer or Stratasys Customer Support. Allȱmonitoringȱandȱcontrollingȱofȱtheȱprinterȱisȱdoneȱfromȱthisȱinterface. Figure 6-3: Stratasys P750K interface One monitor displays both the computer running Objet Studio and the printer server computer. Make sure that the printer interface is displayed. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–3 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Loading Model and Support Cartridges StratasysȱP750Kȱprintersȱuseȱupȱtoȱ12ȱcartridgesȱofȱModelȱmaterialȱandȱfourȱ cartridgesȱofȱSupportȱmaterial,ȱeachȱweighingȱ3.6ȱkilogramsȱwhenȱfull.ȱAȱ graphicalȱrepresentationȱofȱtheȱcartridgesȱloadedȱandȱtheirȱcurrentȱweightȱ appearsȱinȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ3). The materials cabinet uses RFID technology to automatically identify cartridges of printing material. For this purpose, an RFID module is built into the cabinet. Tampering with this module will render the printer inoperable and may void Stratasys warranties and service contracts. Important:ȱȱIfȱyouȱneedȱtoȱreplaceȱtheȱModelȱmaterialȱcurrentlyȱ installedȱwithȱanotherȱtype,ȱseeȱ“ChangingȱtheȱPrintingȱMaterial”ȱ onȱpage 11.ȱOtherwise,ȱmakeȱsureȱtoȱreplaceȱtheȱModelȱcartridgeȱ withȱoneȱcontainingȱtheȱsameȱtypeȱofȱmaterial. To load Model and Support material: 1. Openȱtheȱdoorsȱofȱtheȱmaterialsȱcabinet. 2. LoadȱModelȱandȱSupportȱcontainersȱintoȱtheirȱrespectiveȱ compartments. Youȱshouldȱfeelȱsomeȱresistance,ȱasȱaȱneedleȱpiercesȱtheȱcartridge.ȱ 3. Checkȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱtoȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱnewȱcartridgeȱisȱ detectedȱandȱthatȱitsȱweightȱisȱdisplayedȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ3). 4. Closeȱtheȱmaterialsȱcabinet. Tips about loading and replacing material cartridges: ¾ You can load partially used cartridges, as long as they contain more than 100 grams of material. ¾ You can replace material cartridges either before or during printing. ¾ If printing stops for an extended time before you replace a material cartridge, the printer may go into Standby or Idle mode. If this happens, see “Resuming Production After Printing has Stopped” on page 9. ¾ You can replace partially used cartridges to avoid the need for replacing them during printing. ¾ The cartridge type is automatically detected by the printer. If you replace a cartridge containing different Model material, a message appears recommending that you run the Material Replacement wizard to flush out the old material. 6–4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Producing Models TheȱStratasysȱP750Kȱprinterȱproducesȱmodelsȱbyȱprintingȱtrayȱfilesȱ preparedȱinȱtheȱObjetȱStudioȱapplicationȱandȱsentȱtoȱtheȱprinterȱfromȱthere.ȱ Forȱinformationȱaboutȱpreparingȱmodelȱfilesȱforȱprinting,ȱseeȱ“UsingȱObjetȱ Studio”ȱinȱthisȱuserȱguideȱorȱObjetȱStudioȱHelp. Preparing the Printer Before beginning to produce models, it is recommended that you check the current printing quality of the print heads by performing a pattern test (see “Pattern Test” on page 25). To prepare the printer for producing models: 1. Makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱinȱtheȱprinterȱisȱemptyȱandȱclean.ȱIfȱnot,ȱ removeȱcuredȱmaterialȱwithȱtheȱscraper,ȱandȱcleanȱtheȱtrayȱthoroughlyȱ withȱaȱwetȱcleaningȱcloth. CAUTION: Use protective gloves when cleaning the build tray, and be careful of the sharp edges of the scraper blade. 2. MakeȱsureȱthatȱthereȱisȱsufficientȱModelȱandȱSupportȱmaterialȱloaded,ȱ asȱindicatedȱinȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ3).ȱYouȱmayȱwantȱtoȱ replaceȱtheȱcartridgesȱofȱModelȱandȱSupportȱmaterialȱcurrentlyȱloadedȱ inȱtheȱprinterȱtoȱavoidȱtheȱneedȱforȱreplacingȱthemȱduringȱprinting.ȱ Forȱinstallingȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱandȱreplacingȱemptyȱones,ȱseeȱ “LoadingȱModelȱandȱSupportȱCartridges”ȱonȱpage 4. ForȱchangingȱtheȱtypeȱofȱModelȱmaterialȱcurrentlyȱloaded,ȱseeȱ “ChangingȱtheȱPrintingȱMaterial”ȱonȱpage 11. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–5 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 3. cartridgesOnȱtheȱprinterȱinterface,ȱclickȱtheȱredȱbuttonȱtoȱswitchȱtheȱ printerȱtoȱonlineȱmode. Theȱcolorȱofȱtheȱbuttonȱchangesȱfromȱredȱtoȱgreenȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ4).ȱIfȱ thereȱisȱaȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱqueue,ȱitȱisȱsentȱtoȱtheȱprinter.ȱ Inȱtheȱprinterȱinterface,ȱtheȱprinterȱmodeȱchangesȱfromȱIdleȱtoȱPreȬprint,ȱasȱ theȱprinter’sȱcomponentsȱprepareȱthemselvesȱforȱproduction:ȱ • Theȱprintȱblockȱisȱheated. • TheȱUVȱlampsȱareȱpoweredȱandȱtheyȱwarmȱup. Whenȱprintingȱbegins,ȱObjetȱStudioȱsendsȱsevenȱslicesȱtoȱtheȱprinterȬcontrolȱ application.ȱThisȱisȱtheȱstandardȱbufferȱbetweenȱObjetȱStudioȱandȱtheȱ printer.ȱAsȱeachȱsliceȱisȱprinted,ȱanotherȱsliceȱisȱsentȱtoȱtheȱprinter. Dependingȱonȱtheȱsizeȱofȱtheȱmodel(s)ȱtoȱbeȱproduced,ȱprintingȱcanȱtakeȱ betweenȱseveralȱhoursȱtoȱseveralȱdays.ȱAsȱlongȱasȱthereȱisȱenoughȱModelȱ andȱSupportȱmaterialȱinȱtheȱsupplyȱcartridges,ȱprintingȱproceedsȱ automaticallyȱuntilȱtheȱjobȱisȱfinished. TheȱStratasysȱP750KȱprinterȱusesȱupȱtoȱsixȱdifferentȱModelȬmaterialȱ cartridgesȱtoȱproduceȱmodels.ȱInȱaddition,ȱtwoȱSupportȬmaterialȱcartridgesȱ areȱrequired.ȱIfȱadditionalȱcartridgesȱareȱinstalledȱandȱtheyȱareȱnotȱneededȱ forȱtheȱcurrentȱprintȱjob,ȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱindicatesȱwhichȱareȱbeingȱ used: • Blueȱcartridge—usedȱforȱtheȱprintȱjob • Grayȱcartridge—notȱusedȱforȱtheȱprintȱjob Youȱcanȱmonitorȱprinterȱstatusȱindicatorsȱbyȱswitchingȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱ display.ȱToȱdoȱthis,ȱclickȱtheȱdisplayȱtoggleȱbuttonȱinȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱ screen. Temperature behind print block Temp. of each head Temperature. in front of print block Support/Model material in printblock reservoir Waste weight Chamber temp. System vacuum level Temp. of material pre-heaters Left UV lamp Right UV lamp Display toggle button Printer set to online mode (green) Figure 6-4: Printer indicators 6–6 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Printer I nterface Color Key Theȱbackgroundȱcolorsȱinȱtheȱprinterȱindicatorȱfieldsȱtellȱyouȱatȱaȱglanceȱ whetherȱorȱnotȱtheȱvalueȱorȱitemȱisȱsuitableȱorȱreadyȱforȱprinting.ȱ • Green—suitable/readyȱforȱprinting Forȱexample,ȱinȱfigure 6Ȭ4: Headsȱ(°C)—Theȱheadsȱhaveȱreachedȱtheȱtemperatureȱrequiredȱforȱ printingȱmodels. Ambient—Theȱambientȱtemperatureȱofȱtheȱprintingȱchamberȱisȱ withinȱtheȱacceptableȱrange. HeadsȱLiquid—TheȱlevelȱofȱModelȱandȱSupportȱmaterialȱinȱtheȱ printȬblockȱreservoirȱisȱOK. Vacuum—Theȱvacuumȱlevelȱinȱtheȱsystemȱisȱwithinȱtheȱacceptableȱ range. • Red—notȱsuitableȱforȱprintingȱ(orȱindicatesȱaȱwarning) Forȱexample,ȱinȱfigure 6Ȭ4:ȱ Waste—Theȱweightȱofȱtheȱwasteȱcontainerȱisȱ9000ȱgrams,ȱmoreȱthanȱ allowedȱwhenȱbeginningȱaȱprintȱjob.ȱ(Seeȱ“ReplacingȱtheȱWasteȱ Container”ȱonȱpage 71.) • Blue—notȱready Forȱexample,ȱinȱfigure 6Ȭ4: UVȱlamps—TheȱUVȱlampsȱareȱnotȱon. Theȱcolorȱofȱtheȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱdisplayedȱinȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱ indicatesȱwhichȱcartridgesȱareȱactiveȱforȱtheȱcurrentȱ(orȱnext)ȱprintȱjob. • Blue—activeȱcartridges • Gray—reserveȱcartridges DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–7 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Printing I ndicators TheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱscreenȱchangesȱwhenȱyouȱsendȱaȱprintȱjobȱfromȱObjetȱ Studioȱtoȱtheȱprinter,ȱandȱtheȱprinterȱisȱonȱlineȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ5): • TheȱmodeȱchangesȱfromȱPreȬprintȱtoȱPrinting.ȱ • Theȱspecificȱactivityȱbeingȱperformedȱisȱshownȱinȱtheȱ“currentȱactivity”ȱ field.ȱ • CurrentȱjobȬprintingȱinformationȱisȱdisplayed. • Theȱprintingȱprogressȱbarȱisȱdisplayed. • TheȱStopȱandȱPauseȱbuttonsȱareȱenabled. Whenȱtheȱweightȱofȱaȱcartridgeȱdropsȱbelowȱ100ȱgrams,ȱtheȱdisplayȱofȱtheȱ materialȱlevelȱinȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱisȱred.ȱ Printer mode Job information Current activity Job information Progress bar Stop button Pause button Figure 6-5: Printer interface during printing 6–8 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Resuming Production After Printing has Stopped Ifȱtheȱprintingȱprocessȱisȱinterrupted,ȱObjetȱStudioȱstopsȱsendingȱslicesȱtoȱ theȱprinter.ȱThisȱcanȱhappen,ȱforȱexample,ȱifȱtheȱprintingȱmaterialȱrunsȱoutȱ inȱtheȱmiddleȱofȱaȱprintȱjob,ȱandȱyouȱdon’tȱreplaceȱtheȱemptyȱcartridgeȱ immediately.ȱAfterȱtheȱprinterȱchangesȱtoȱStandbyȱorȱIdleȱmode,ȱyouȱneedȱtoȱ resumeȱprintingȱfromȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱofȱObjetȱStudio. After printing stops, the printer goes into Standby mode, when heating of print heads is reduced. About 10 hours later, the printer goes into Idle mode, when heating of print heads is stopped. To continue printing the model: 1. Ifȱtheȱprinterȱisȱinȱofflineȱmode,ȱswitchȱitȱtoȱonlineȱmodeȱbyȱclickingȱtheȱ redȱbuttonȱatȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ3ȱonȱ page 3). Theȱbuttonȱchangesȱfromȱredȱtoȱgreenȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ4ȱonȱpage 6). 2. Ifȱyouȱdon’tȱknowȱwhyȱprintingȱhasȱstopped,ȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱ connectionȱbetweenȱtheȱprinterȱandȱtheȱserverȱcomputerȱisȱactive. 3. InȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱofȱObjetȱStudio,ȱclickȱtheȱResumeȱiconȱ 4. InȱtheȱContinueȱfromȱSliceȱdialogȱboxȱthatȱappears,ȱconfirmȱtheȱsliceȱ number,ȱafterȱcheckingȱtheȱprinterȱinterface. Printer mode Last slice printed Figure 6-6: Printer interface after interrupted printing Figure 6-7: Continue from Slice confirmation in Objet Studio (Job Manager screen) 5. If,ȱforȱanyȱreason,ȱtheȱcorrectȱnumberȱdoesȱnotȱappearȱinȱtheȱdialogȱ box,ȱenterȱtheȱnumberȱandȱclickȱOK. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–9 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Youȱcannotȱcontinueȱprintingȱtheȱmodelȱif: • Theȱnumberȱofȱtheȱlastȱsliceȱprintedȱdoesȱnotȱappearȱinȱtheȱprinterȱ interface,ȱevenȱifȱtheȱserverȱcomputerȱdisplaysȱtheȱContinueȱfromȱSliceȱ confirmationȱdialogȱbox. • Thereȱwasȱaȱrelativelyȱlongȱinterruptionȱinȱprinting,ȱevenȱifȱtheȱ“lastȱ slice”ȱandȱ“continueȱfromȱslice”ȱindicatorsȱareȱcorrect.ȱTheȱpartȱofȱtheȱ modelȱalreadyȱprintedȱmayȱdeformȱorȱshrink,ȱandȱthereȱmightȱbeȱaȱ visibleȱdifferenceȱbetweenȱitȱandȱtheȱnewlyȱprintedȱpart.ȱTheȱeffectsȱofȱaȱ printingȱstoppageȱonȱaȱmodelȱdependȱonȱtheȱmodelȱsizeȱandȱstructure,ȱ Modelȱmaterialȱused,ȱambientȱtemperatureȱandȱtheȱlengthȱofȱtheȱ stoppage. If you cannot continue printing: 1. CancelȱtheȱprintȱjobȱinȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreen. 2. Removeȱtheȱpartiallyȱprintedȱmodelȱfromȱtheȱbuildȱtray.ȱ 3. RestartȱtheȱjobȱfromȱtheȱJobȱManagerȱscreenȱ(inȱObjetȱStudio). You can stop and later resume printing from either the printer interface or from the Job Manager screen of Objet Studio. After clicking the Stop button on the printer interface, you can resume printing only from the Job Manager screen. However, after clicking the Pause button in the printer interface, you can only resume printing from the printer interface. 6–10 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Changing the Printing Material Beforeȱproducingȱmodelsȱusingȱaȱdifferentȱtypeȱofȱprintingȱmaterialȱthanȱisȱ currentlyȱinstalled,ȱrunȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱwizardȱtoȱflushȱtheȱprintȱ blockȱandȱfeedȱtubes. You should carefully plan printing models with different Model materials to avoid unnecessary waste of the materials currently loaded. The amount of material flushed depends on the flushing cycle chosen and if you are replacing one or more Model cartridges. The Material Replacement wizard suggests the best slot locations for placing different material cartridges, based on materials currently in the system. This ensures minimum flushing of materials currently loaded. To replace the printing material with the wizard: 1. StartȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenu. Figure 6-8: Starting the Material Replacement wizard 2. Inȱtheȱopeningȱscreen,ȱclickȱNext. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–11 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 3. Ifȱtheȱprinterȱcoverȱisȱnotȱclosed,ȱaȱscreenȱappears,ȱpromptingȱyouȱtoȱ closeȱtheȱcover.ȱConfirmȱthatȱitȱisȱclosedȱandȱclickȱNext. 4. Chooseȱtheȱconfigurationȱforȱproducingȱmodels:ȱ • 6ȱmaterials • 3ȱmaterials ¾ 6 materials EachȱofȱtheȱModelȱmaterialsȱisȱloadedȱintoȱaȱseparateȱchamberȱinȱtheȱ printȱheads. Youȱcanȱprintȱwithȱanyȱofȱtheȱloadedȱmaterialsȱwithoutȱtheȱneedȱtoȱ runȱtheȱwizard. ¾ 3 materials TwoȱchambersȱinȱeachȱofȱtheȱthreeȱModelȱprintȱheadsȱareȱusedȱforȱeachȱ Modelȱmaterial. Thisȱmodeȱisȱrequiredȱtoȱproduceȱbuildȱtraysȱatȱhighȱspeed,ȱusingȱupȱ toȱthreeȱModelȱmaterials. 5. InȱtheȱRequiredȱmaterialsȱsectionȱofȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱselectȱoneȱorȱmoreȱ replacementȱmaterials. 6. SelectȱBoth cartridgesȱifȱyouȱneedȱtoȱloadȱtwoȱreplacementȱcartridges. Loadingȱoneȱreplacementȱcartridgeȱisȱmoreȱeconomicalȱbecauseȱitȱ potentiallyȱrequiresȱlessȱflushingȱofȱmaterialȱcurrentlyȱinȱtheȱsystem.ȱ However,ȱwhenȱoneȱcartridgeȱisȱnotȱsufficient,ȱloadingȱtwoȱcartridgesȱ enablesȱcontinuousȱprintingȱuntilȱtheȱprintȱjobȱisȱcompleted.ȱWhenȱoneȱ cartridgeȱemptiesȱandȱtheȱotherȱoneȱisȱbeingȱused,ȱyouȱcanȱreplaceȱtheȱ emptyȱcartridgeȱwithȱaȱnewȱone. 6–12 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 7. Chooseȱhowȱthoroughlyȱyouȱwantȱtoȱflushȱoutȱmaterialȱcurrentlyȱinȱtheȱ system: • Economy.ȱThisȱcycleȱcanȱbeȱusedȱwhenȱreplacingȱaȱlightȬcoloredȱ Modelȱmaterialȱwithȱaȱdarkerȱmaterialȱ(suchȱasȱTangoBlack™ȱorȱ VeroBlack™),ȱorȱifȱtheȱexactȱcolorȱofȱtheȱprintedȱmodelsȱ(inȱtheȱfirstȱ printȱjobs)ȱisȱunimportant.ȱ Theȱwizardȱflushesȱtheȱsystemȱwithȱtheȱminimumȱamountȱofȱ materialȱneededȱtoȱensureȱthatȱmodelsȱhaveȱtheȱmechanicalȱ propertiesȱofȱtheȱnewȱmaterial. • Full.ȱUseȱthisȱcycleȱwhenȱtheȱprintedȱmodelsȱmustȱhaveȱtheȱexactȱ colorȱofȱtheȱnewȱmaterial. Theȱwizardȱthoroughlyȱflushesȱtheȱfeedȱtubesȱandȱprintȱheadsȱ neededȱforȱprinting,ȱbasedȱonȱyourȱselectionsȱinȱtheȱpreviousȱ screens.ȱ 8. ClickȱNextȱtoȱbeginȱtheȱmaterialȱreplacementȱprocessȱinȱtheȱprinter. There are additional settings that you can select for special purposes (see Advanced Settings). If necessary, click Advanced Settings before clicking Next. TheȱCartridgeȱpositioningȱscreenȱappears,ȱshowingȱyouȱtheȱnewȱlocationȱ ofȱallȱcartridgesȱinȱtheȱmaterialsȱcabinet. Figure 6-9: Cartridge placement Symbols: Theȱcorrectȱcartridgeȱisȱinȱthisȱslot. Noȱcartridgeȱ(orȱtheȱincorrectȱcartridge)ȱisȱinȱthisȱslot. Theȱcartridgeȱinȱthisȱslotȱhasȱinsufficientȱweightȱtoȱcompleteȱtheȱ materialȱreplacementȱprocess. Theȱexpirationȱdateȱofȱtheȱcartridgeȱinȱthisȱslotȱhasȱpassed. 9. Replaceȱmaterialȱcartridges,ȱasȱnecessary,ȱaccordingȱtoȱtheȱinstructionsȱ inȱtheȱwizardȱscreen. 10. ClickȱStart. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–13 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 11. Readȱtheȱwarningȱmessage,ȱandȱclickȱOK. If you continue, you must complete the material replacement process before you can produce models. To replace material at another time, click Cancel. If you continue (by clicking OK) and you do not complete the process, you will need to run the wizard again before producing models. Figure 6-10: Final wizard screen 12. ClickȱDoneȱtoȱcloseȱtheȱwizard. TheȱprinterȬcontrolȱapplicationȱisȱautomaticallyȱupdated,ȱandȱtheȱ interfaceȱdisplaysȱtheȱnewȱmaterial(s).ȱTheȱObjetȱStudioȱapplicationȱ(onȱ theȱprinterȬserverȱcomputer)ȱisȱalsoȱupdatedȱandȱdisplaysȱtheȱnewȱ material(s). 13. Inspectȱtheȱareaȱaroundȱtheȱpurgeȱunitȱandȱcleanȱit,ȱifȱnecessary. CAUTION: Dispose of all material cartridges in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. If necessary, the cartridges can be disassembled for recycling. If this is done, protect the person handling the cartridges from direct exposure to uncured resins. Advanced Settings TheȱAdvancedȱSettingsȱdialogȱboxȱenablesȱyouȱtoȱconfigureȱtheȱMaterialȱ Replacementȱwizardȱforȱspecialȱpurposes.ȱIfȱnecessary,ȱclickȱAdvanced SettingsȱinȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱOptionsȱscreenȱbeforeȱclickingȱNext. Figure 6-11: Advanced Replacement settings 6–14 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Positioning Byȱdefault,ȱAutomaticȱslotȱselectionȱdeterminesȱtheȱbestȱslotȱlocationsȱforȱtheȱ cartridgesȱinȱtheȱmaterialsȱcabinet,ȱbasedȱonȱmaterialsȱcurrentlyȱinȱtheȱ system.ȱThisȱensuresȱminimumȱflushingȱofȱmaterialsȱcurrentlyȱloaded.ȱIfȱ thereȱisȱaȱspecialȱneedȱtoȱloadȱcartridgesȱinȱcertainȱslotȱlocations,ȱselectȱ Manual slot selection. AfterȱclickingȱApply,ȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱOptionsȱscreenȱappears,ȱbutȱ now,ȱeachȱmaterialȱselectionȱboxȱcorrespondsȱtoȱoneȱofȱtheȱcartridgeȱlevelsȱ inȱtheȱmaterialsȱcabinet. Figure 6-12: Manual cartridge placement Flush Again TheȱflushingȱcycleȱyouȱselectȱinȱtheȱMaterialȱReplacementȱOptionsȱscreenȱ determinesȱhowȱthoroughlyȱtoȱflushȱoutȱmaterialȱcurrentlyȱinȱtheȱsystem.ȱ AfterȱselectingȱtheȱEconomyȱcycleȱandȱcompletingȱtheȱwizard,ȱyouȱmightȱ decideȱthatȱyouȱrequireȱaȱmoreȱthoroughȱflushing,ȱtoȱensureȱaccurateȱ modelȱcolor.ȱOr,ȱyouȱmayȱnoticeȱthatȱprintedȱmodelsȱareȱnotȱsatisfactoryȱ becauseȱtheyȱcontainȱtracesȱofȱtheȱpreviousȱmaterial.ȱIfȱso,ȱyouȱcanȱflushȱoutȱ moreȱmaterial,ȱsoȱthatȱtheȱnextȱmodelsȱwillȱbeȱprintedȱwithȱpureȱmaterial. Afterȱselectingȱtheȱ“flushȱagain”ȱoptionȱandȱclickingȱApply,ȱtheȱMaterialȱ ReplacementȱOptionsȱscreenȱappears,ȱwhereȱyouȱselectȱtheȱaffectedȱ material(s)ȱtoȱbeȱflushed. Note: Select only the materials you need to flush. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–15 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Keeping the Printer in I dle Mode Betweenȱprintingȱjobs,ȱtheȱStratasysȱP750Kȱprinterȱcanȱbeȱkeptȱonȱforȱupȱtoȱ oneȱweek.ȱIfȱtheȱprinterȱwillȱnotȱbeȱusedȱforȱmoreȱthanȱaȱweek,ȱuseȱtheȱ Shutdownȱwizardȱtoȱautomaticallyȱperformȱtheȱproceduresȱthatȱmustȱbeȱ doneȱbeforeȱturningȱoffȱtheȱprinterȱ(seeȱ“ShuttingȱDownȱtheȱPrinter,”ȱ below). Whenȱtheȱprinterȱstopsȱproducingȱmodels,ȱtheȱprinterȱsoftwareȱ automaticallyȱreducesȱtheȱtemperatureȱofȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱasȱfollows: Time after printing Mode Change in heating of print heads firstȱ15ȱminutes Standbyȱ1 none nextȱ10ȱhours Standbyȱ2 heatingȱreducedȱ(toȱroomȱtemp.) afterȱ10ȱhours Idle heatingȱstopped Note: The printer mode is indicated in the green field on the left of the interface (see figures 6-3, 6-4 and 6-5 on pages 3, 6 and 8). If,ȱafterȱprintingȱaȱjob,ȱyouȱknowȱthatȱtheȱprinterȱwillȱnotȱbeȱusedȱforȱ10ȱ hoursȱorȱmore,ȱyouȱcanȱimmediatelyȱturnȱoffȱtheȱheatingȱofȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱ byȱputtingȱtheȱprinterȱintoȱIdleȱmode. To put the printer into Idle mode: ¾ FromȱtheȱFileȱmenuȱ(inȱtheȱprinterȱinterface)ȱclickȱExit. Note: The printer remains in Idle mode until you open the Stratasys printer application and begin printing again. When the printer is in Idle mode, do not turn it off. It can remain in this mode—with the cover closed—for up to a week. For longer periods, shut down the printer by running the Shutdown wizard (see below). 6–16 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Shutting Down the Printer YouȱonlyȱneedȱtoȱshutȱdownȱtheȱStratasysȱprinterȱifȱitȱwillȱnotȱbeȱusedȱforȱaȱ weekȱorȱmore.ȱOtherwise,ȱtheȱprinterȱcanȱremainȱon,ȱinȱIdleȱmode.ȱ The Shutdown process flushes printing materials from printer components. To avoid flushing out valuable material, make sure to print models at least once a week. Many printer operators use this opportunity to print customer samples or test models. Toȱproperlyȱshutȱdown,ȱtheȱprinterȱneedsȱtoȱperformȱseveralȱprocesses.ȱ TheseȱareȱcontrolledȱbyȱtheȱShutdownȱwizard.ȱDoȱnotȱattemptȱtoȱshutȱ downȱtheȱprinterȱbyȱsimplyȱclosingȱtheȱcomputerȱinterfaceȱ(theȱprinterȬ controlȱapplication),ȱandȱneverȱdisconnectȱpowerȱtoȱtheȱprinterȱbeforeȱ completingȱthisȱwizard. CAUTION: Not using the printer for an extended period without first running the wizard can cause serious damage to print heads and other expensive printer parts. Dependingȱonȱtheȱlengthȱofȱtimeȱtheȱprinterȱwillȱnotȱbeȱused,ȱyouȱcanȱ chooseȱbetweenȱaȱshortȱshutdownȱprocedure,ȱandȱaȱmoreȱthoroughȱ procedure. • Upȱtoȱ30ȱdays:ȱTheȱwizardȱemptiesȱtheȱprintȱblockȱofȱModelȱandȱ Supportȱmaterial,ȱtoȱpreventȱleaks.ȱThisȱtakesȱaboutȱ10ȱminutes. • Moreȱthanȱ30ȱdays:ȱTheȱwizardȱemptiesȱtheȱprintȱblock,ȱthenȱflushesȱ theȱsystemȱwithȱcleaningȱfluid.ȱThisȱtakesȱupȱtoȱ75ȱminutes,ȱandȱyouȱ mustȱbeȱpresentȱtoȱloadȱcleaningȬfluidȱcartridgesȱwhenȱinstructed.ȱ To run the Shutdown wizard: 1. StartȱtheȱShutdownȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenu. Figure 6-13: Shutdown wizard, opening screen 2. ClickȱNext. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–17 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 3. Chooseȱtheȱappropriateȱoptionȱforȱtheȱlengthȱofȱtimeȱthatȱtheȱprinterȱ willȱnotȱbeȱused—lessȱorȱmoreȱthanȱ30ȱdays. Note: Before selecting More than 30 days, make sure that cleaning-fluid are available. Figure 6-14: Shutdown options 4. Inȱtheȱnextȱscreen,ȱverifyȱthatȱtheȱtrayȱisȱemptyȱandȱclickȱNext. Theȱshutdownȱprocedureȱbegins. Figure 6-15: Shutdown progress screen Figure 6-16: Final Shutdown wizard screen 5. Afterȱtheȱprinterȱcomputerȱshutsȱdown,ȱturnȱoffȱtheȱmainȱpowerȱswitchȱ atȱtheȱbackȱofȱtheȱprinter. 6–18 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Maintaining the Printer Theȱperformanceȱofȱroutineȱmaintenanceȱtasksȱisȱessentialȱforȱgettingȱ satisfactoryȱresultsȱfromȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprinters.ȱPerformȱtheȱtasksȱatȱ specifiedȱintervalsȱforȱoptimumȱperformance. Routine Maintenance Schedule DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) ȱ Frequency Task For More Information Beforeȱ/ȱafterȱprinting CheckȱUVȱlampȱ overheatingȱindicator. Seeȱ“UVȱLampȱCheck”ȱ onȱpage 20. Beforeȱ/ȱafterȱprinting Cleanȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱ andȱtheȱrollerȱsurface. Seeȱ“CleaningȱtheȱPrintȱ HeadsȱandȱtheȱRoller”ȱ onȱpage 20. Daily Cleanȱandȱinspectȱtheȱ wiper. Seeȱ“Cleaningȱandȱ ReplacingȱtheȱWiper”ȱ onȱpage 23. Weekly PerformȱtheȱPatternȱtest. Seeȱ“PatternȱTest”ȱonȱ page 25. Weekly—whenȱprintingȱ withȱMED610 CalibrateȱtheȱUVȱ intensity. Seeȱ“Testingȱandȱ CalibratingȱtheȱUVȱ Lamps”ȱonȱpage 53. Weekly Cleanȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱ collector. Everyȱ300ȱhoursȱofȱ printingȱ(Aȱreminderȱ messageȱappears.) CalibrateȱtheȱUVȱ intensity. Seeȱ“Testingȱandȱ CalibratingȱtheȱUVȱ Lamps”ȱonȱpage 53. Everyȱ300ȱhoursȱofȱ printingȱ(Aȱreminderȱ messageȱappears.) Optimizeȱtheȱprintȱ heads. Seeȱ“Optimizingȱ (Calibrating)ȱPrintȱ Heads”ȱonȱpage 35. Monthly,ȱandȱafterȱ replacingȱprintȱheads Checkȱtheȱalignmentȱofȱ theȱprintȱheads. Seeȱ“AligningȱtheȱPrintȱ Heads”ȱonȱpage 32. Monthly Restartȱtheȱprinterȱ computer. Monthly Inspectȱtheȱexhaustȱ systemȱ(duct,ȱfan,ȱ connections). Monthlyȱ Calibrateȱtheȱloadȱcells. Seeȱ“Calibratingȱtheȱ LoadȱCells”ȱonȱpage 59. Everyȱ3500ȱhoursȱofȱ printingȱorȱeveryȱtwoȱ years Preventiveȱmaintenanceȱ visitȱbyȱauthorizedȱ serviceȱengineer. ContactȱyourȱStratasysȱ serviceȱprovider. Seeȱ“CleaningȱtheȱRollerȱ WasteȱCollectorȱandȱ InspectingȱtheȱRollerȱ Scraper”ȱonȱpage 27. 6–19 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer UV Lamp Check AȱheatȬsensitiveȱlabelȱisȱfixedȱtoȱtheȱUVȱlampȱcoversȱasȱaȱwarningȱagainstȱ overheating.ȱItsȱcenterȱchangesȱfromȱwhiteȱtoȱblackȱifȱtheȱtemperatureȱofȱ theȱcoverȱreachesȱ65 °Cȱ(150 °F).ȱIfȱthisȱoccurs,ȱdoȱnotȱuseȱtheȱprinter,ȱandȱ callȱyourȱserviceȱprovider.ȱAsȱaȱprecaution,ȱitȱisȱrecommendedȱthatȱyouȱ checkȱtheȱlabelȱbeforeȱandȱafterȱprinting.ȱ Normal Overheating problem Figure 6-17: Heat-sensitive label on UV lamp cover If the UV lamp continues to overheat, and the temperature around the lamp reaches 90 °C (194 °F), a heat fuse cuts the power to the UV lamp and the motion motors. In the unlikely event that this occurs, the printer cannot be used until it is serviced by an authorized service engineer. Cleaning the Print Heads and the Roller Periodicȱinspectionȱandȱcleaningȱofȱtheȱorificeȱplatesȱonȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱ printȱblockȱensuresȱthatȱtheȱprintȱnozzlesȱareȱnotȱclogged.ȱAȱwizardȱguidesȱ youȱthroughȱtheȱprocedure,ȱandȱadjustsȱcomponentsȱofȱtheȱprinterȱtoȱ enableȱyouȱtoȱperformȱit.ȱThisȱprocedureȱtakesȱaboutȱ20ȱminutes,ȱandȱ shouldȱbeȱdoneȱatȱtheȱbeginningȱofȱtheȱworkȱdayȱorȱbeforeȱaȱbigȱprintingȱ job. To clean the print heads and the roller: 1. Prepare— • • • • isopropanolȱ(IPA—isopropylȱalcohol)ȱorȱethanolȱ(ethylȱalcohol) disposableȱcleaningȱgloves aȱsuppliedȱcleaningȱclothȱorȱequivalent aȱmirror 2. StartȱtheȱHeadȱCleaningȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenuȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ22ȱ onȱpage 23). 6–20 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 3. Followȱtheȱinstructionsȱonȱtheȱwizardȱscreens,ȱandȱselectȱtheȱ confirmationȱcheckȱboxes. Figure 6-18: Head cleaning procedure—wizard screen 4. ClickȱNext.ȱ Theȱprinterȱpreparesȱforȱyouȱtoȱcleanȱtheȱprintȱheads. 5. Whenȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱappears,ȱopenȱtheȱcover. Figure 6-19: Head cleaning wizard—steps 5–11 WARNING: The print head orifice plates (bottom surface) might be hot, so proceed with caution. 6. Placeȱtheȱmirrorȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray. 7. Putȱonȱtheȱgloves. CAUTION: Uncured printing material on the print heads might cause skin irritation. Use disposable cleaning gloves to protect your hands. 8. Soakȱtheȱcleaningȱclothȱwithȱalcohol. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–21 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 9. Cleanȱtheȱorificeȱplates,ȱwithȱaȱbackȬandȬforthȱmotionȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ20).ȱ Useȱtheȱmirrorȱtoȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱyouȱhaveȱremovedȱallȱofȱtheȱresidueȱ material. Figure 6-20: Cleaning the heads 10. Cleanȱtheȱentireȱrollerȱsurface,ȱbyȱrotatingȱitȱasȱyouȱclean. Use this opportunity to clean the glass lens on the UV lamps. 11. Whenȱyouȱhaveȱfinishedȱcleaning,ȱselectȱtheȱconfirmationȱcheckȱboxesȱ inȱtheȱwizardȱscreenȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ19)ȱandȱclickȱNext. 12. Removeȱtheȱcleaningȱmaterialsȱfromȱtheȱprinterȱandȱcloseȱtheȱcover.ȱ 13. Selectȱtheȱconfirmationȱcheckȱboxesȱinȱtheȱwizardȱscreenȱandȱclickȱ Next. TheȱheadȬpurgeȱcycleȱbegins.ȱWhenȱthisȱisȱcomplete,ȱtheȱfinalȱwizardȱ screenȱappears. Figure 6-21: Head-cleaning wizard—final screen 14. ClickȱDoneȱtoȱcloseȱtheȱwizard. 6–22 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Cleaning and Replacing the Wiper Aȱrubberȱwiperȱremovesȱexcessȱmaterialȱfromȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱafterȱtheȱ purgeȱsequence.ȱThisȱisȱdoneȱautomaticallyȱbeforeȱeachȱprintȱjob,ȱandȱ performedȱmanuallyȱduringȱmaintenanceȱtasks.ȱYouȱshouldȱcleanȱtheȱ wiperȱandȱsurroundingȱareaȱatȱleastȱonceȱaȱweek.ȱIfȱtheȱwiperȱisȱdamagedȱ orȱworn,ȱreplaceȱit. To inspect and clean the wiper: 1. Prepare— • • • • isopropanolȱ(IPA—isopropylȱalcohol)ȱorȱethanolȱ(ethylȱalcohol) disposableȱcleaningȱgloves theȱsuppliedȱcleaningȱclothȱorȱequivalent aȱspareȱwiper 2. StartȱtheȱWiperȱCleaningȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenu. Figure 6-22: Starting the Wiper Cleaning wizard 3. Inȱtheȱopeningȱwizardȱscreen,ȱclickȱNext. 4. Makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱempty,ȱandȱcloseȱtheȱprinterȱcover. ConfirmȱthisȱinȱtheȱwizardȱscreenȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-23: Wiper Cleaning procedure—step 4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–23 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 5. Whenȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱappears,ȱopenȱtheȱcover. Figure 6-24: Wiper Cleaning wizard during steps 6–10 6. Putȱonȱtheȱcleaningȱgloves. 7. Usingȱaȱgenerousȱamountȱofȱalcoholȱonȱtheȱcleaningȱcloth,ȱremoveȱanyȱ materialȱremainingȱonȱtheȱwiperȱandȱtheȱsurroundingȱarea. 8. Removeȱanyȱpiecesȱofȱwasteȱmaterialȱcollectedȱinȱtheȱpurgeȱunit.ȱIfȱ necessary,ȱremoveȱtheȱwasteȱcollectorȱtoȱcleanȱit.ȱWipeȱtheȱrubberȱseal. Figure 6-25: Purge unit waste collector Note: When returning the waste collector to the purge unit, make sure to insert it as shown. 9. Inspectȱtheȱwiper.ȱ Ifȱtheȱwiperȱisȱscratched,ȱtornȱorȱworn,ȱorȱifȱyouȱcannotȱcleanȱitȱ completely,ȱreplaceȱit. a. Graspȱitȱandȱpullȱitȱupȱandȱoutȱofȱitsȱbracket.ȱ b. Insertȱtheȱnewȱwiperȱblade,ȱmakingȱsureȱthatȱitȱisȱstraightȱandȱsecuredȱ wellȱonȱbothȱsides. 10. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreenȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ24),ȱconfirmȱthatȱtheȱwiperȱbladeȱisȱ clean,ȱandȱclickȱNext. 11. Removeȱallȱtoolsȱandȱcleaningȱmaterialsȱfromȱtheȱprinter,ȱandȱcloseȱtheȱ cover. 6–24 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 12. Confirmȱthisȱinȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-26: Confirmation screen 13. ClickȱDoneȱtoȱcloseȱtheȱwizard. Pattern Test Theȱpatternȱtestȱisȱtheȱbasicȱverificationȱofȱtheȱprinter’sȱabilityȱtoȱproduceȱ qualityȱmodels,ȱsinceȱitȱdemonstratesȱtheȱconditionȱofȱtheȱnozzlesȱinȱtheȱ printȱheads.ȱMakeȱsure,ȱtherefore,ȱthatȱyouȱperformȱthisȱtestȱweekly,ȱandȱ wheneverȱyouȱsuspectȱaȱprintingȱproblem. To perform the pattern test: 1. Makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱempty. 2. Prepareȱaȱsheetȱofȱpinkȱpaper—AȬ4ȱorȱLetterȱsize. 3. Inȱtheȱprinter,ȱtapeȱtheȱpinkȱpaperȱtoȱtheȱsurfaceȱleftȱofȱtheȱbuildȱtray. 4. PressȱF3,ȱorȱopenȱtheȱOptionsȱmenuȱandȱselectȱPattern Test. Figure 6-27: Pattern Test confirmation 5. Ifȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱnotȱclear,ȱclickȱNoȱinȱtheȱfollowingȱdialogȱbox. Thisȱlowersȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱsoȱthatȱmodelsȱonȱtheȱtrayȱareȱnotȱdamaged. Figure 6-28: Build tray (Z) level adjustment Theȱprinterȱprintsȱaȱseriesȱofȱlinesȱonȱtheȱtestȱpaperȱ(seeȱnextȱfigure). DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–25 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Figure 6-29: Sample Pattern Test 6. Carefullyȱinspectȱtheȱtestȱpaperȱtoȱseeȱifȱthereȱareȱmissingȱlines.ȱ Tooȱmanyȱmissingȱlines,ȱespeciallyȱifȱtheyȱareȱinȱtheȱsameȱarea,ȱ indicatesȱthatȱtheȱqualityȱofȱprintingȱwhenȱproducingȱmodelsȱwillȱbeȱ poor.ȱIfȱthisȱisȱtheȱcase,ȱseeȱ“ImprovingȱPrintȱQuality,”ȱbelow. Note: Acceptable model quality is subjective, and depends on the type and scale (size) of the models produced. As a rule, however, more than 10 missing lines in one area of a column is considered unacceptable. I mproving Print Quality Ifȱyouȱsuspectȱthatȱprintȱqualityȱisȱpoor,ȱperformȱtheȱpatternȱtestȱ(seeȱ “PatternȱTest”ȱonȱpage 25).ȱIfȱtheȱresultsȱareȱpoor,ȱuseȱtheȱfollowingȱ procedureȱtoȱimproveȱprintȱquality. If the results of the last pattern test are poor: 1. FromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenu,ȱselectȱPurge Sequence,ȱorȱpressȱF4. 2. Inȱtheȱconfirmationȱdialogȱbox,ȱclickȱYes. TheȱprintȱheadsȱareȱpurgedȱofȱModelȱandȱSupportȱmaterial,ȱandȱtheȱ wiperȱremovesȱexcessȱmaterialȱfromȱthem. 3. Repeatȱtheȱpurgeȱsequence. 4. Performȱtheȱpatternȱtest. If the results of the pattern test are still poor: 1. Manuallyȱcleanȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱ(seeȱ“CleaningȱtheȱPrintȱHeadsȱandȱtheȱ Roller”ȱonȱpage 20). 2. Performȱtheȱpurgeȱsequence. 3. Performȱtheȱpatternȱtest. If the results of the pattern test are still poor: 1. Carefullyȱcleanȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱagain,ȱmakingȱsureȱthereȱisȱnoȱresidueȱ leftȱonȱthem. 2. Performȱtheȱpurgeȱsequence. 3. Performȱtheȱpatternȱtest. If the results of the pattern test are still poor: ¾ Optimizeȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱandȱreplaceȱfaultyȱprintȱheads,ȱifȱnecessaryȱ (seeȱ“Optimizingȱ(Calibrating)ȱPrintȱHeads”ȱonȱpage 35). 6–26 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Cleaning the Roller Waste Collector and I nspecting the Roller Scraper Theȱrollerȱwasteȱcollectorȱremovesȱwasteȱmaterialȱscrapedȱfromȱtheȱroller.ȱ Suctionȱremovesȱthisȱwasteȱtoȱtheȱprinter’sȱwasteȱcontainer.ȱ Thisȱassemblyȱshouldȱbeȱcleanedȱweeklyȱtoȱpreventȱaȱblockageȱinȱtheȱtubesȱ leadingȱtoȱtheȱwasteȱcontainer,ȱsoȱthatȱwasteȱmaterialȱdoesȱnotȱoverflowȱ intoȱtheȱprinter. To clean the roller waste collector: 1. Prepare— • • • • • M2.5ȱandȱM2ȱAllen®ȱkeys disposableȱcleaningȱgloves isopropanolȱ(IPA—isopropylȱalcohol)ȱorȱethanolȱ(ethylȱalcohol) cleaningȱcloth cottonȱswabsȱ(QȬtipsȱorȱsimilar) 2. Putȱonȱtheȱgloves. 3. RemoveȱtheȱrightȱUVȬlampȱassembly: a. DisconnectȱtheȱUVȱpowerȱcableȱandȱtheȱfanȱpowerȱcable. Fan power connector UV Power connector Screw Figure 6-30: Disconnecting the right UV assembly b. RemoveȱtheȱscrewȱthatȱsecuresȱtheȱrightȱUVȱlamp,ȱandȱthenȱpullȱandȱ liftȱupȱtheȱUVȱlamp. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–27 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 4. Loosenȱtheȱtwoȱscrewsȱsecuringȱtheȱsuctionȱtubeȱonȱtheȱprintȱblock. Suction tube screws Figure 6-31: Lifting the suction tube 5. Liftȱtheȱsuctionȱtubeȱtoȱsecureȱitȱinȱaȱraisedȱposition. 6. Removeȱtheȱtwoȱscrewsȱsecuringȱtheȱcoveringȱofȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱ collectorȱandȱremoveȱit. Be very careful to save the covering screws. These are special screws; if they are lost, you need to order replacements. Roller waste collector screws Figure 6-32: Removing the roller waste collector covering 7. Removeȱtheȱcoveringȱbyȱpullingȱitȱout,ȱandȱthenȱlowerȱit. 8. Cleanȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱcollectorȱandȱtheȱscraperȱbladeȱsurfaceȱusingȱ cottonȱswabs.ȱMakeȱsureȱtoȱremoveȱanyȱremainingȱprintingȱmaterials. Figure 6-33: Cleaning the roller waste collector Before replacing the covering, you can check the effectiveness of the roller scraper—see below. 6–28 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide To check the effectiveness of the roller scraper: 1. Putȱonȱtheȱcleaningȱgloves. 2. Wetȱaȱclothȱwithȱisopropanol. 3. Useȱtheȱclothȱtoȱwetȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱroller. 4. Turnȱtheȱrollerȱslowlyȱwithȱyourȱhand.ȱAsȱtheȱbladeȱscrapesȱtheȱroller,ȱ makeȱsureȱtheȱisopropanolȱisȱspreadȱevenlyȱoverȱtheȱentireȱlengthȱofȱ theȱblade. 5. Inspectȱtheȱroller.ȱIfȱitȱisȱnotȱdry,ȱreplaceȱtheȱblade.ȱ(Seeȱ“Replacingȱtheȱ RollerȱScraper”ȱonȱpage 30.) 6. Beforeȱreturningȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱcollectorȱtoȱtheȱprintȱblock,ȱmakeȱsureȱ thatȱtheȱpinsȱareȱclean.ȱ Roller waste collector pins Figure 6-34: Roller waste collector pins To re-assemble the components: 1. Returnȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱcollectorȱtoȱtheȱprintȱblockȱandȱscrewȱonȱtheȱ coveringȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ32ȱonȱpage 28). 2. Loosenȱtheȱscrewsȱsecuringȱtheȱsuctionȱtube. Securing screws Figure 6-35: Suction tube correctly positioned 3. Lowerȱitȱsoȱthatȱtheȱholeȱinȱtheȱpanelȱbehindȱtheȱsuctionȱtubeȱisȱvisible,ȱ andȱtightenȱtheȱscrewsȱtoȱsecureȱtheȱtube.ȱ 4. AttachȱtheȱrightȬUVȬlampȱassemblyȱtoȱtheȱprintȱblockȱandȱreconnectȱ theȱUVȱpowerȱandȱfanȱcables. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–29 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Replacing the Roller Scraper Youȱshouldȱreplaceȱtheȱrollerȱscraperȱblade— • afterȱ1,000ȱhoursȱofȱprinting. • ifȱitȱdoesȱnotȱeffectivelyȱkeepȱtheȱrollerȱclean. You should periodically test the effectiveness of the roller scraper when you clean the roller waste collector. See “Cleaning the Roller Waste Collector and Inspecting the Roller Scraper” on page 27. To replace the roller scraper: 1. Prepare— • aȱnewȱrollerȱscraperȱbladeȱ(KITȬ01026ȬS) • aȱPhillipsȱ1x75ȱmmȱscrewdriver • M2.5ȱandȱM2ȱAllen®ȱkeys 2. RemoveȱtheȱrightȱUVȱlampȱandȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱcollectorȱcoveringȱ(seeȱ stepsȱ3ȱtoȱ6ȱonȱpage 27.) 3. Loosenȱtheȱtwoȱscrewsȱsecuringȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱcollectorȱandȱpullȱitȱ out. Figure 6-36: Removing the roller waste collector 4. Removeȱtheȱscrewsȱthatȱsecureȱtheȱrollerȱscraperȱassembly.ȱ Figure 6-37: Removing the roller scraper screws 6–30 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Figure 6-38: Removing the old roller scraper blade 5. Removeȱtheȱscraperȱbladeȱandȱdiscardȱit. 6. Placeȱtheȱnewȱscraperȱbladeȱontoȱtheȱpinsȱinȱtheȱholder,ȱasȱshown.ȱ Figure 6-39: Inserting the new roller scraper blade 7. Insertȱandȱtightenȱtheȱrollerȱscraperȱbladeȱscrews. Important: ¾ Tighten the screws in the order shown in figure 6-40. ¾ Use the new screws supplied in the replacement kit. Figure 6-40: Tightening the roller scraper screws DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–31 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 8. Afterȱtighteningȱtheȱscrews,ȱinspectȱtheȱbladeȱandȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱitȱisȱ straight.ȱIfȱnecessary,ȱloosenȱtheȱscrewsȱandȱtightenȱthemȱagain,ȱevenly. 9. ReturnȱtheȱrollerȱwasteȱcollectorȱassemblyȱandȱtheȱrightȱUVȱlampȱtoȱ theȱprintȱblock.ȱSeeȱstepsȱ6ȱtoȱ4,ȱfromȱpage 29. Aligning the Print Heads Youȱshouldȱcheckȱtheȱalignmentȱofȱtheȱprintȱheads—ȱ • onceȱaȱmonth • afterȱreplacingȱoneȱorȱmoreȱheads • ifȱmodelȱqualityȱisȱnotȱacceptableȱevenȱafterȱcleaningȱtheȱorificeȱplateȱonȱ theȱbottomȱofȱtheȱprintȱblockȱ(seeȱ“CleaningȱtheȱPrintȱHeadsȱandȱtheȱ Roller”ȱonȱpage 20) Thisȱprocedureȱtakesȱaboutȱ20ȱminutes. To check the alignment of the print heads: 1. Prepare— • aȱtransparencyȱsheet—AȬ4ȱorȱLetterȱsize • anyȱtypeȱofȱstickyȱtape,ȱtoȱfastenȱtheȱtransparencyȱsheetȱtoȱtheȱbuildȱ tray 2. StartȱtheȱHeadȱAlignmentȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenuȱ(seeȱ figure 6Ȭ8ȱonȱpage 11). 3. ClickȱNextȱtoȱbegin,ȱandȱcloseȱtheȱcover. 4. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱtoȱconfirmȱthatȱtheȱcoverȱisȱ closed,ȱandȱclickȱNext. 5. Whenȱinstructedȱtoȱdoȱso,ȱplaceȱtheȱtransparencyȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray—ȱ nextȱtoȱtheȱleftȱandȱrearȱedgesȱofȱtheȱtray,ȱasȱshownȱinȱtheȱfollowingȱ figure. Figure 6-41: Positioning the transparency on the build tray 6. Makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱtransparencyȱsheetȱisȱlyingȱflat,ȱandȱtapeȱitȱtoȱtheȱ tray. 7. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱtoȱconfirmȱthatȱtheȱ transparencyȱsheetȱisȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱandȱclickȱNext. Theȱprinterȱprintsȱtheȱheadȱalignmentȱtestȱonȱtheȱtransparency. 6–32 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 8. Whenȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱappears,ȱremoveȱtheȱtransparency. Figure 6-42: Head Alignment wizard—steps 8–10 Theȱtransparencyȱsheetȱisȱprintedȱwithȱsetsȱofȱverticalȱlinesȱinȱsevenȱ columns,ȱeachȱshowingȱtheȱresultsȱfromȱaȱdifferentȱprintȱhead. Figure 6-43: Sample head-alignment test Note: There is no column for head H7 because its alignment is used as a reference for aligning all other heads. 9. Forȱeachȱcolumnȱofȱlines,ȱuseȱaȱmagnifyingȱglassȱorȱloupeȱtoȱinspectȱ pairsȱofȱconsecutiveȱrowsȱprintedȱonȱtheȱtransparencyȱtoȱseeȱwhereȱtheȱ verticalȱlinesȱalign. Figure 6-44: Comparing rows of alignment lines Note: It does not matter which pair of lines you inspect, since they were all printed by the same head. Choose a pair of clearly printed lines for the inspection. (Since some nozzles may not print clearly, you may have to inspect several pairs of lines to properly view the alignment.) DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–33 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Optimumȱheadȱalignmentȱisȱshownȱwhenȱtheȱfourthȱlinesȱinȱtheȱupperȱ andȱlowerȱrowsȱareȱaligned,ȱasȱinȱfigure 6Ȭ44.ȱInȱtheȱexampleȱshown,ȱnoȱ changeȱtoȱtheȱheadȱalignmentȱisȱnecessary.ȱIfȱotherȱlinesȱinȱtheȱsetȱareȱ aligned,ȱyouȱneedȱtoȱchangeȱtheȱalignmentȱofȱthatȱhead—inȱtheȱnextȱ wizardȱscreens. 10. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreenȱshownȱinȱfigure 6Ȭ42,ȱselectȱtheȱTransparencyȱ removedȱcheckȱbox,ȱandȱclickȱNext. Theȱfirstȱinȱaȱseriesȱofȱalignmentȱscreensȱappears. Figure 6-45: Head alignment screen 11. InȱtheȱheadȬalignmentȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱnumberȱthatȱindicatesȱwhichȱ linesȱalignȱinȱtheȱupperȱandȱlowerȱrowsȱofȱaȱpairȱonȱtheȱtransparencyȱ (countingȱfromȱtheȱleft)ȱforȱthisȱprintȱhead. Note: Because the alignment of the fourth lines is optimum, the number “4” is selected, by default, in the wizard screen. This does not change the head alignment. If you select other numbers, the wizard adjusts the head alignment, accordingly. 12. ClickȱNextȱtoȱdisplayȱtheȱnextȱheadȱalignmentȱscreen,ȱandȱagainȱselectȱ theȱnumberȱrepresentingȱtheȱmostȱcloselyȱalignedȱverticalȱlinesȱonȱtheȱ transparencyȱforȱthatȱprintȱhead. Whenȱyouȱhaveȱfinishedȱaligningȱallȱofȱtheȱheads,ȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱ isȱdisplayed. Figure 6-46: Parameter update confirmation 6–34 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 13. Continueȱasȱfollows: • Toȱmakeȱtheȱalignmentȱchangesȱinȱtheȱprinter,ȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱYesȱisȱ selected,ȱandȱclickȱNext. • Toȱrecheckȱtheȱalignmentȱtestȱresultsȱbeforeȱmakingȱtheȱalignmentȱ changesȱinȱtheȱprinter,ȱclickȱPrevious. • Ifȱyouȱdoȱnotȱwantȱtoȱmakeȱalignmentȱchangesȱinȱtheȱprinterȱatȱthisȱ time,ȱselectȱNoȱandȱclickȱNext. 14. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱyouȱcanȱchooseȱtoȱeitherȱrepeatȱtheȱheadȱ alignmentȱprocedureȱorȱcloseȱtheȱwizard.ȱ • Ifȱtheȱmostȱcloselyȱalignedȱverticalȱlinesȱforȱaȱprintȱheadȱwereȱatȱ eitherȱextreme—theȱfirstȱorȱseventhȱlines—chooseȱRepeatȱtheȱtest,ȱ thenȱclickȱNext.ȱ Theȱtransparencyȱtestȱwillȱshowȱifȱtheȱheadsȱareȱnowȱproperlyȱ aligned,ȱand—ifȱnot—theȱwizardȱwillȱallowȱyouȱtoȱ“fineȱtune”ȱtheȱ alignment. • Ifȱtheȱverticalȱlinesȱforȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱwereȱnotȱalignedȱatȱeitherȱ extreme,ȱchooseȱEndȱtheȱwizard,ȱthenȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-47: Repeat head alignment option Optimizing (Calibrating) Print Heads Theȱconditionȱofȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱdirectlyȱaffectsȱtheȱqualityȱofȱprintedȱ models.ȱToȱmaintainȱoptimumȱprinting,ȱyouȱshouldȱroutinelyȱtestȱtheȱprintȱ headsȱandȱcalibrateȱthemȱtoȱtheȱbestȱworkingȱconfigurationȱpossible.ȱToȱdoȱ this,ȱrunȱtheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizardȱeveryȱ300ȱhoursȱofȱprinting. Duringȱthisȱprocedure,ȱyouȱplaceȱaȱscaleȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱandȱconnectȱitȱtoȱ theȱprinter.ȱTheȱweightsȱofȱprintedȱsamplesȱareȱanalyzedȱbyȱtheȱwizardȱtoȱ determineȱhowȱtoȱoptimizeȱtheȱprintȱheads.ȱ If,ȱduringȱtheȱoptimizationȱprocess,ȱtheȱwizardȱdeterminesȱthatȱaȱprintȱheadȱ isȱfaulty—orȱthatȱitȱisȱnegativelyȱaffectingȱlayerȱuniformityȱwithȱtheȱcurrentȱ headȱconfiguration—theȱwizardȱinstructsȱyouȱtoȱreplaceȱit.ȱIfȱthisȱhappens,ȱ youȱhaveȱtheȱoptionȱtoȱreplaceȱtheȱprintȱheadȱorȱtoȱabortȱtheȱwizardȱandȱ replaceȱtheȱheadȱatȱanotherȱtime.ȱ Run the Head Optimization wizard whenever the condition of print heads is negatively affecting the quality of printed models, or if you suspect that there is a problem with one or more of the print heads. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–35 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Note: To accurately test and calibrate print heads, they must be clean. If necessary, run the Head Cleaning wizard before beginning this procedure. To test and calibrate the print heads: 1. Prepare— • disposableȱcleaningȱglovesȱ(anyȱclean,ȱpowderȬfreeȱprotectiveȱ gloves) • pinkȱpaper • theȱMissingȱNozzlesȱruler • theȱscaleȱsuppliedȱforȱuseȱwithȱthisȱwizard Note: Ensure that the scale is calibrated and charged before beginning this procedure. 2. StartȱtheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenu. Figure 6-48: Starting the Head Optimization wizard 3. Inȱtheȱopeningȱwizardȱscreen,ȱclickȱNextȱtoȱbegin. TheȱWizardȱConditionsȱscreenȱappears. 4. Readȱtheȱconditions,ȱselectȱIȱAgreeȱandȱclickȱNext. 6–36 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 5. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱselectȱContinue with Head optimizationȱifȱyouȱ haveȱrecentlyȱcleanedȱtheȱprintȱheads.ȱOtherwise,ȱcancelȱtheȱwizardȱ andȱrunȱtheȱHeadȱCleaningȱwizard. Figure 6-49: Clean print heads screen 6. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱmakeȱsureȱOptimizeȱallȱprintȱheadsȱisȱselectedȱ andȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-50: Procedure selection screen 7. Selectȱtheȱprintingȱmodeȱforȱwhichȱyouȱwantȱtoȱoptimizeȱtheȱprintȱ headsȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-51: Printing mode selection DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–37 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 8. Whenȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱappears,ȱtapeȱaȱsheetȱofȱpinkȱpaperȱtoȱtheȱ surfaceȱleftȱofȱtheȱbuildȱtray,ȱcloseȱtheȱcoverȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-52: Preparations confirmation TheȱprinterȱprintsȱaȱframeȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱandȱthenȱprintsȱtheȱPatternȱ Test. 9. WhenȱtheȱPatternȱTestȱisȱprinted,ȱcarefullyȱinspectȱit,ȱusingȱtheȱMissingȱ NozzlesȱRulerȱtoȱseeȱifȱthereȱareȱmissingȱlines. Figure 6-53: Inspecting the Pattern Test Eachȱmissingȱlineȱrepresentsȱaȱfaultyȱnozzleȱinȱtheȱprintȱhead. 10. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱwizardȱscreen,ȱenterȱtheȱnumberȱofȱmissingȱnozzlesȱ forȱeachȱprintȱheadȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-54: Enter Missing Nozzles screen 6–38 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 11. Theȱwizardȱcontinuesȱaccordingȱtheȱnumberȱofȱmissingȱnozzlesȱyouȱ entered.ȱ Ifȱthereȱareȱtooȱmanyȱmissingȱnozzlesȱforȱacceptableȱprinting,ȱtheȱ wizardȱinstructsȱyouȱtoȱreplaceȱtheȱdefectiveȱprintȱhead(s).ȱYouȱcanȱ doȱthisȱnow,ȱorȱabortȱtheȱwizard. Ifȱyouȱareȱpreparedȱtoȱreplaceȱprintȱheadsȱnow,ȱtheȱwizardȱguidesȱ youȱthroughȱtheȱprocedureȱwhenȱyouȱclickȱNext.ȱMakeȱsureȱyouȱ haveȱreplacementȱheadsȱandȱtheȱrequiredȱtoolsȱ(seeȱpage 42).ȱ Continueȱwithȱ“PreparingȱtheȱPrint Block”ȱonȱpage 44. Figure 6-55: Head replacement due to missing nozzles Ifȱtheȱnumberȱofȱmissingȱnozzlesȱinȱallȱprintȱheadsȱisȱacceptable,ȱtheȱ wizardȱcontinuesȱwithȱtheȱheadȱoptimizationȱprocessȱ(below). 12. Setȱupȱtheȱscaleȱinȱtheȱprinterȱbyȱperformingȱtheȱstepsȱlistedȱinȱtheȱ wizardȱscreen. Figure 6-56: Setting up the Head Optimization scale DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–39 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 13. Afterȱconfirmingȱallȱofȱtheȱitemsȱlistedȱinȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱclickȱNext. Printingȱmaterialȱ(resin)ȱisȱjettedȱfromȱeachȱheadȱandȱitsȱweightȱisȱ automaticallyȱrecorded.ȱThisȱprocessȱisȱrepeatedȱforȱeachȱprintingȱ mode,ȱafterȱwhichȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱappears. Figure 6-57: Emptying the Resin Container 14. Carefullyȱremoveȱtheȱresinȱcontainerȱfromȱtheȱscaleȱandȱemptyȱitȱintoȱ theȱpurgeȱunitȱinȱtheȱprinter.ȱThenȱreturnȱtheȱcontainerȱtoȱtheȱscale. CAUTION: The resin in the container is uncured. ¾ To prevent contact with skin, wear neoprene or nitrile gloves. ¾ Dispose of uncured resin in accordance with applicable regulations. By emptying the container into the purge unit, the resin is stored in the printer’s sealed waste container. 15. CloseȱtheȱprinterȱandȱclickȱNext. Theȱprinterȱcuresȱtheȱremainingȱresinȱinȱtheȱcontainer. 16. Whenȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱappears,ȱremoveȱtheȱscaleȱandȱcleanȱtheȱ buildȱtray.ȱ Figure 6-58: Removing the Scale confirmation screen Theȱwizardȱusesȱtheȱdataȱcollectedȱtoȱanalyzeȱtheȱconditionȱofȱtheȱprintȱ headsȱandȱoptimizeȱthemȱsoȱtheyȱprintȱmodelsȱwithȱaȱuniformȱlayerȱofȱ material.ȱ • Ifȱtheȱheadsȱareȱinȱsatisfactoryȱcondition,ȱtheȱfollowingȱwizardȱscreenȱ appears. 6–40 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Figure 6-59: Final wizard screen, after optimizing print heads • Ifȱtheȱwizardȱdeterminesȱthatȱaȱprintȱheadȱisȱfaulty—orȱthatȱitȱisȱ negativelyȱaffectingȱmodelȱqualityȱwithȱtheȱcurrentȱheadȱ configuration—youȱneedȱtoȱreplaceȱit.ȱIndicateȱwhetherȱorȱnotȱyouȱ wantȱtoȱdoȱsoȱnow. Figure 6-60: Defective print heads found ChooseȱReplaceȱdefectiveȱhead(s)ȱifȱyouȱareȱpreparedȱtoȱreplaceȱtheȱ printȱheadsȱnowȱ(seeȱbelow).ȱ or— ChooseȱAbortȱwizardȱifȱyouȱwantȱtoȱreplaceȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱatȱanotherȱ time. Replace print heads only after consulting with a Stratasys-authorized customer-support engineer. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–41 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Toȱreplaceȱprintȱheads,ȱyouȱneedȱtheseȱtoolsȱandȱmaterials: • replacementȱprintȱhead(s) • isopropanolȱ(IPA—isopropylȱalcohol)ȱorȱethanolȱ(ethylȱalcohol) • disposableȱcleaningȱglovesȱ(suppliedȱwithȱtheȱprintȱhead;ȱorȱuseȱ anyȱclean,ȱpowderȬfreeȱprotectiveȱgloves) • aȱsuppliedȱcleaningȱclothȱorȱequivalent • aȱmirror • aȱ5ȱmmȱflatȬheadȱscrewdriverȱorȱaȱ3ȱmmȱhexȱ(Allen®)ȱkey,ȱ dependingȱonȱtheȱtypeȱofȱprintȱblock • theȱscaleȱsuppliedȱforȱuseȱinȱtheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizardȱ(Weightȱ Test) • theȱMissingȱNozzlesȱruler Ifȱyouȱareȱreplacingȱprintȱheadsȱnow,ȱtheȱwizardȱguidesȱyouȱthroughȱtheȱ procedureȱwhenȱyouȱclickȱNext.ȱContinueȱwithȱ“PreparingȱtheȱPrint Block”ȱ onȱpage 44. Replacing Print Heads Theȱconditionȱofȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱdirectlyȱaffectsȱtheȱqualityȱofȱprintedȱ models.ȱYouȱmayȱneedȱtoȱreplaceȱaȱprintȱheadȱifȱoneȱorȱmoreȱofȱtheȱ followingȱsymptomsȱoccurs: • TheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizardȱdeterminesȱthatȱaȱprintȱheadȱisȱ defective.ȱ(Seeȱ“Optimizingȱ(Calibrating)ȱPrintȱHeads”ȱonȱpage 35.) • Thereȱareȱnoticeableȱgroovesȱinȱtheȱsurfaceȱofȱprintedȱmodels. • Visualȱinspectionȱofȱtheȱheadȱrevealsȱthatȱitsȱsurfaceȱisȱdamaged— peelingȱorȱbubblesȱinȱtheȱnozzleȱarea. • Theȱprinterȱinterfaceȱdisplaysȱaȱwarningȱorȱmalfunctionȱmessageȱ relatingȱtoȱaȱprintȱhead— HeadȱHeaterȱtemperatureȱtimeout HeadȱHeaterȱthermistorȱopen HeadȱHeaterȱthermistorȱshort Replace print heads only after consulting with an authorized customersupport engineer. 6–42 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide TheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizardȱguidesȱyouȱthroughȱtheȱprocedureȱofȱ replacingȱaȱprintȱheadȱandȱadjustsȱprinterȱcomponentsȱtoȱenableȱyouȱtoȱ performȱit.ȱOnlyȱreplaceȱaȱprintȱheadȱwithȱtheȱaidȱofȱtheȱwizard.ȱTheȱentireȱ procedureȱtakesȱaboutȱ45ȱminutes,ȱandȱconsistsȱofȱtheȱfollowingȱphases:ȱ A. Identifyingȱtheȱhead(s)ȱneedingȱreplacement.ȱ ThisȱisȱnormallyȱdoneȱbyȱtheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizard.ȱOtherwise,ȱ evidenceȱofȱphysicalȱdamageȱtoȱtheȱheadȱsurfaceȱorȱaȱmalfunctionȱ messageȱindicatesȱwhichȱheadȱneedsȱreplacing. B. Preparingȱtheȱprintȱblockȱforȱheadȱreplacement. Thisȱisȱdoneȱautomaticallyȱwhenȱyouȱrunȱtheȱwizard. C. Removingȱtheȱdefectiveȱprintȱhead. D. Installingȱaȱnewȱprintȱhead. E. Optimizingȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱ(doneȱautomaticallyȱbyȱtheȱwizard). F. Performingȱheadȱalignment. To replace a print head: 1. Prepare— • replacementȱprintȱhead(s) • isopropanolȱ(IPA—isopropylȱalcohol)ȱorȱethanolȱ(ethylȱalcohol) • disposableȱcleaningȱglovesȱ(suppliedȱwithȱtheȱprintȱhead;ȱorȱuseȱ anyȱclean,ȱpowderȬfreeȱprotectiveȱgloves) • aȱsuppliedȱcleaningȱclothȱorȱequivalent • aȱmirror • aȱ5ȱmmȱflatȬheadȱscrewdriverȱorȱaȱ3ȱmmȱhexȱ(Allen®)ȱkey,ȱ dependingȱonȱtheȱtypeȱofȱprintȱblock • theȱscaleȱsuppliedȱforȱuseȱinȱtheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizardȱ(Weightȱ Test) • theȱMissingȱNozzlesȱruler Note: Make sure that you have these items and that the scale is calibrated and charged before continuing. 2. StartȱtheȱHeadȱOptimizationȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenuȱ(seeȱ figure 6Ȭ48ȱonȱpage 36). 3. Inȱtheȱopeningȱwizardȱscreen,ȱclickȱNextȱtoȱbegin. TheȱWizardȱConditionsȱscreenȱappears. 4. Readȱtheȱconditions,ȱselectȱIȱAgreeȱandȱclickȱNext. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–43 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 5. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱselectȱContinue with Head optimizationȱifȱyouȱ haveȱrecentlyȱcleanedȱtheȱprintȱheads.ȱOtherwise,ȱcancelȱtheȱwizardȱ andȱrunȱtheȱHeadȱCleaningȱwizard. Figure 6-61: Clean print heads screen 6. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱselectȱReplaceȱfaultyȱheadsȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-62: Procedure selection screen Preparing the Print Block 7. Selectȱtheȱprintȱhead(s)ȱneedingȱreplacementȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-63: Head selection screen 6–44 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Theȱprinterȱheatsȱandȱemptiesȱtheȱprintȱblockȱandȱpreparesȱtheȱprinter.ȱ (Thisȱcanȱtakeȱupȱtoȱ15ȱminutes.) Figure 6-64: Printer preparation progress screen 8. Theȱfollowingȱscreenȱappearsȱwhenȱtheȱprinterȱisȱreadyȱforȱyouȱtoȱ replaceȱprintȱheads. Figure 6-65: Printer ready for head replacement 9. Putȱonȱtheȱprotectiveȱglovesȱandȱopenȱtheȱprinterȱcover. Note: The printer disconnects power to the heads for your safety. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–45 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Removing the Defective Head 10. Onȱtheȱprintȱblock,ȱreleaseȱtheȱupperȱandȱlowerȱscrewsȱthatȱsecureȱtheȱ printȱheadȱinȱtheȱblock.ȱ(Ifȱnecessary,ȱyouȱmayȱuseȱaȱscrewdriverȱtoȱ loosenȱtheȱscrews.) Figure 6-66: Releasing the locking screws 11. Pressȱdownȱonȱtheȱupperȱandȱlowerȱlockingȱscrewsȱtoȱreleaseȱtheȱprintȱ head. Figure 6-67: Releasing the print head 12. Loosenȱtheȱscrewsȱonȱtheȱdoorȱofȱtheȱcompartmentȱprotectingȱtheȱ printȬheadȱdriverȱcardsȱ(A),ȱthenȱpullȱandȱliftȱupȱtheȱdoorȱ(B). Figure 6-68: Opening the print-head compartment 6–46 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 13. PullȱtheȱprintȬheadȱdriverȱcardȱoutȱofȱitsȱsocketȱsoȱthatȱtheȱheadȱisȱfreeȱ (A)ȱandȱremoveȱitȱfromȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱprintȱblockȱ(B). Figure 6-69: Releasing the print-head driver card to remove the head 14. Makeȱsureȱthatȱalongȱwithȱtheȱhead,ȱyouȱremoveȱtheȱtwoȱrubberȱOȬringȱ seals. Figure 6-70: O-ring seals on the print head Important: If the seals are not removed with the head, they are probably stuck to the print block housing. If so, remove them. Figure 6-71: Making sure the O-rings are not stuck to the print block DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–47 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Installing the New Head 15. InspectȱtheȱreplacementȱheadȱandȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱOȬringȱsealsȱareȱ inȱplaceȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ70). 16. Gentlyȱinsertȱtheȱreplacementȱheadȱintoȱtheȱvacantȱslotȱinȱtheȱprintȱ blockȱandȱpushȱtheȱprintȬheadȱdriverȱcardȱintoȱitsȱsocket. Note: Make sure to insert the head with the driver card facing its socket, in the rear of the print block. Figure 6-72: Inserting the print-head driver card into its socket 17. Pushȱtheȱheadȱupȱuntilȱyouȱhearȱitȱclickȱintoȱplace,ȱinȱbothȱfrontȱandȱ rearȱholders. Figure 6-73: Clicking the head into place in the print block 18. Lowerȱtheȱdoorȱofȱtheȱprintȱheadȱcompartmentȱandȱtightenȱtheȱscrewsȱ toȱlockȱitȱinȱplace. 19. Tightenȱtheȱupperȱandȱlowerȱscrewsȱthatȱsecureȱtheȱprintȱheadȱinȱtheȱ printȱblockȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ66ȱonȱpage 46). Note: Hand-tighten these screws. Do not use a screwdriver. 6–48 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 20. InȱtheȱReplaceȱprintȱheadsȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱtoȱconfirmȱthatȱ youȱhaveȱreplacedȱtheȱhead(s)ȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-74: Head replacement confirmation 21. Withȱyourȱfingers,ȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱnewȱheadȱisȱlevelȱandȱevenȱwithȱ theȱotherȱheads. Figure 6-75: Checking the level of the new head 22. Confirmȱthatȱtheȱheadsȱareȱlevelȱandȱevenȱbyȱselectingȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱinȱ theȱfollowingȱwizardȱscreenȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-76: Installation-check screen DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–49 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 23. Inȱtheȱnextȱwizardȱscreen,ȱconfirmȱthatȱyouȱhaveȱremovedȱallȱtoolsȱandȱ objectsȱfromȱtheȱprinter. Figure 6-77: Cleared-tray confirmation screen 24. Closeȱtheȱprinterȱcover. Theȱwizardȱcontinuesȱbyȱheatingȱtheȱheads,ȱthenȱfillingȱandȱpurgingȱthem.ȱ Ifȱthereȱareȱnoȱinstallationȱproblems,ȱtheȱoptimizationȱprocedureȱbegins,ȱtoȱ calibrateȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱtoȱtheȱbestȱworkingȱconfiguration—seeȱ “Optimizingȱ(Calibrating)ȱPrintȱHeads”ȱonȱpage 6Ȭ35. Ifȱinstallationȱproblemsȱareȱdetected,ȱtheȱwizardȱalertsȱyouȱandȱinstructsȱ youȱhowȱtoȱcontinueȱ(seeȱ“InstallationȱProblems,”ȱnext). Afterȱreplacingȱprintȱheads,ȱyouȱshouldȱcheckȱtheȱheadȱalignmentȱbeforeȱ usingȱtheȱprinterȱtoȱproduceȱmodels.ȱInȱtheȱfinalȱwizardȱscreen... ¾ SelectȱYesȱandȱclickȱDoneȱtoȱopenȱtheȱHeadȱAlignmentȱwizardȱ(seeȱ “AligningȱtheȱPrintȱHeads”ȱonȱpage 32).ȱ ¾ SelectȱNoȱandȱclickȱDoneȱtoȱalignȱtheȱheadsȱatȱanotherȱtime. Figure 6-78: Final wizard Screen 6–50 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Installation Problems Ifȱtheȱprinterȱdetectsȱthatȱthereȱisȱaȱproblemȱafterȱyouȱinstallȱprintȱheads,ȱ relevantȱwarningȱscreensȱappear. • Ifȱtheȱprinterȱsoftwareȱdoesȱnotȱdetectȱtheȱreplacedȱhead,ȱtheȱfollowingȱ warningȱscreenȱappears.ȱ Figure 6-79: Incorrect-installation screen Ifȱthisȱhappens:ȱ a. Openȱtheȱprintȱheadȱcompartmentȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ68ȱonȱpage 46). b. ReȬinsertȱtheȱprintȬheadȱdriverȱcardȱintoȱitsȱsocketȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ72ȱ onȱpage 48). c. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱtoȱconfirmȱthatȱyouȱhaveȱ reȬinsertedȱtheȱcardȱandȱclickȱNext. • IfȱtheȱreplacementȱheadȱwasȱnotȱfactoryȬcalibrated,ȱtheȱfollowingȱ warningȱscreenȱappears.ȱ Figure 6-80: Invalid-data warning screen Ifȱthisȱhappens:ȱ a. Removeȱtheȱheadȱandȱreplaceȱitȱwithȱanotherȱoneȱ(startingȱwithȱ step 10ȱonȱpage 46). b. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱtoȱconfirmȱthatȱyouȱhaveȱ installedȱanotherȱprintȱheadȱandȱclickȱNext. c. ContactȱyourȱauthorizedȱCustomerȱSupportȱcenterȱaboutȱtheȱ unformattedȱhead. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–51 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer • Ifȱtheȱvacuumȱtestȱisȱnotȱsuccessful,ȱtheȱreplacementȱheadȱwasȱnotȱ sealedȱproperlyȱduringȱinstallation,ȱandȱtheȱfollowingȱwarningȱscreenȱ appears. Figure 6-81: Vacuum-leakage warning screen Ifȱthisȱhappens:ȱ a. ClickȱNext. b. FollowȱtheȱinstructionsȱonȱtheȱwizardȱscreensȱtoȱreȬinstallȱtheȱhead. 6–52 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Testing and Calibrating the UV Lamps TheȱeffectiveȱUVȱradiationȱfromȱtheȱlampsȱusedȱforȱcuringȱmodelsȱcanȱ changeȱoverȱtime.ȱToȱensureȱoptimumȱcuringȱofȱmodelsȱduringȱprinting,ȱaȱ popȬupȱmessageȱremindsȱyouȱtoȱtestȱtheȱlampsȱandȱcalibrateȱtheirȱeffectiveȱ UVȱradiationȱafterȱeveryȱ300ȱhoursȱofȱprinting.ȱYouȱdoȱthisȱbyȱrunningȱtheȱ UVȱCalibrationȱWizard. ToȱmeasureȱtheȱUVȱradiation,ȱyouȱneed: • StratasysȱTOLȬ03005ȬSȱ(UVȱsensorȱandȱcable,ȱsuppliedȱwithȱtheȱprinter) or— • aȱstandȬaloneȱUVȱradiationȱmeter,ȱapprovedȱforȱuseȱwithȱtheȱprinter Theȱwizardȱcomparesȱtheȱmeasuredȱradiationȱtoȱtheȱrecommendedȱ radiationȱlevelȱforȱeachȱofȱtheȱlamps,ȱatȱeachȱprintingȱmode—HighȱSpeed,ȱȱ HighȱQualityȱandȱDigitalȱMaterial. Whenȱcalibratingȱtheȱlamps,ȱtheȱwizardȱattemptsȱtoȱadjustȱtheȱradiationȱ level,ȱifȱnecessary. • Ifȱtheȱreadingȱisȱwithinȱtheȱacceptableȱrange,ȱtheȱwizardȱcontinuesȱtoȱ theȱnextȱphase.ȱ • Ifȱfurtherȱadjustmentȱisȱnecessary,ȱtheȱcurrentȱphaseȱisȱrepeated.ȱ • IfȱtheȱUVȱradiationȱisȱtooȱlowȱtoȱbeȱproperlyȱadjusted,ȱtheȱwizardȱ continuesȱtoȱtheȱnextȱphase,ȱbutȱtheȱfinalȱwizardȱscreenȱindicatesȱthatȱ theȱlamp’sȱradiationȱforȱtheȱprintingȱmodeȱisȱunacceptable. Before testing and calibrating the UV lamps: ¾ Make sure the glass lens on each of the UV lamps is clean. For easy access, run the Head Cleaning Wizard, and use the special cleaning pad supplied. ¾ Make sure that the glass over the UV radiation sensor is clean. To test and calibrate UV lamp radiation: 1. StartȱtheȱUVȱCalibrationȱWizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenuȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ22ȱ onȱpage 6Ȭ23). 2. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱselectȱCalibrate UV Intensity toȱadjustȱtheȱlamp’sȱ radiationȱlevelȱtoȱtheȱacceptableȱrange.ȱ Figure 6-82: UV Test/Calibration selection DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–53 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 3. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱselectȱtheȱUVȱsensorȱandȱmeasuringȱdeviceȱtoȱ beȱused. Figure 6-83: UV device selection UV Measuring Device When you use the Stratasys UV sensor (TOL-03005-S), you connect it to the printer. The wizard automatically measures and calibrates the UV radiation. If you use a stand-alone UV radiation meter, you need to manually enter the readings from the meter in the wizard screens. 4. Makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱclearȱ(empty),ȱconfirmȱthisȱinȱtheȱ wizardȱscreenȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-84: Printer preparation ¾ WhenȱusingȱtheȱStratasysȱUVȱsensorȱ(TOLȬ03005ȬS),ȱcontinueȱwithȱ “UVȱsensorȱconnectedȱtoȱprinter,”ȱbelow. ¾ WhenȱusingȱaȱstandȬaloneȱradiationȱmeter,ȱcontinueȱwithȱ“ExternalȱUVȱ meter”ȱonȱpage 57. 6–54 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide The following steps apply when using the Stratasys UV sensor that you connect to the printer (TOL-03005-S). They do not apply when using a stand-alone UV radiation measuring device. UV sensor connected to printer 1. AdjustȱtheȱwizardȱforȱtheȱsensitivityȱofȱtheȱUVȱsensorȱbyȱenteringȱtheȱ CFȱnumberȱthatȱappearsȱonȱtheȱsensor’sȱlabel. Figure 6-85: UV sensor synchronization Figure 6-86: Label on the bottom of the UV sensor TheȱbuildȱtrayȱlowersȱsoȱyouȱcanȱconnectȱtheȱUVȱsensor. Figure 6-87: UV sensor connector DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–55 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 2. ConnectȱtheȱUVȱsensorȱcableȱtoȱtheȱconnectorȱinȱtheȱprinter. Figure 6-88: Sensor preparation 3. ConfirmȱtheȱitemsȱlistedȱinȱtheȱwizardȱscreenȱandȱclickȱNext. Continue with “UV measurement” on page 58. 6–56 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide External UV meter The following steps apply when using a stand-alone UV meter. They do not apply when using the Stratasys UV sensor connected to the printer. 1. Whenȱtheȱfollowingȱscreenȱappears,ȱopenȱtheȱprinterȱandȱplaceȱtheȱUVȱ sensorȱatȱtheȱrearȱedgeȱofȱtheȱtray,ȱinȱtheȱcenter. Figure 6-89: Sensor placement screen Figure 6-90: Correct UV-sensor placement 2. Leadȱtheȱcableȱoutȱofȱtheȱprinterȱsoȱthatȱyouȱcanȱcloseȱtheȱprinter,ȱandȱ makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱcableȱwillȱnotȱinterfereȱwithȱtheȱmovingȱprintȱblock. 3. Closeȱtheȱprinter,ȱwhileȱcheckingȱthatȱtheȱsensorȱdoesȱnotȱmoveȱoutȱofȱ position. 4. SetȱtheȱUVȱmeterȱtoȱmeasureȱmJ/cm2. 5. Setȱtheȱrangeȱonȱtheȱmeterȱtoȱ2,000. 6. ConnectȱtheȱcableȱfromȱtheȱsensorȱtoȱtheȱUVȱmeter.ȱ 7. TurnȱonȱtheȱUVȱmeter,ȱandȱwaitȱuntilȱ“0ȱ0ȱ0.0”ȱappearsȱonȱtheȱdisplay. 8. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱconfirmȱthatȱtheȱsensorȱisȱpositionedȱcorrectly,ȱ andȱclickȱNext. Continue with “UV measurement” on page 58. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–57 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer UV measurement TheȱUVȱlampsȱpowerȱupȱandȱstabilize.ȱ(Thisȱtakesȱseveralȱminutes.)ȱThen,ȱ theȱprintȱblockȱpassesȱoverȱtheȱsensorȱandȱtheȱwizardȱcomparesȱtheȱ measuredȱradiationȱtoȱtheȱrecommendedȱlevelȱforȱeachȱUVȱlampȱandȱ printingȱmode.ȱDuringȱthisȱprocess,ȱwhichȱtakesȱ20–40ȱminutes,ȱyouȱneedȱ toȱmonitorȱtheȱprogressȱasȱdisplayedȱinȱtheȱwizardȱscreen. Figure 6-91: UV measurement progress ¾ WhenȱusingȱaȱstandȬaloneȱradiationȱmeter,ȱresetȱtheȱmeterȱandȱenterȱtheȱ readingȱ(measurement)ȱwhenȱyouȱareȱpromptedȱtoȱdoȱso. Figure 6-92: UV measurement dialog box IfȱtheȱUVȱlevelȱmeasuredȱisȱnotȱacceptable,ȱtheȱwizardȱcalibratesȱtheȱUVȱ lampȱbyȱadjustingȱtheȱcurrentȱsuppliedȱtoȱit,ȱandȱthenȱtestsȱitȱagain. WhenȱallȱUVȱtestsȱhaveȱfinished,ȱtheȱresultsȱareȱdisplayed,ȱshowingȱtheȱ conditionȱofȱtheȱlampsȱafterȱcalibrationȱ(seeȱfigure 6Ȭ93). Figure 6-93: Results and condition of UV lamps after calibration 6–58 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide After examining the UV calibration results: 1. ClickȱNext. 2. RemoveȱtheȱUVȱsensorȱandȱcloseȱtheȱprinterȱcover.ȱAfterȱconfirmingȱ theȱitemsȱlistedȱinȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-94: Final UV Calibration Wizard screen Calibrating the Load Cells Loadȱcellsȱareȱsensorsȱthatȱmeasureȱtheȱweightȱofȱtheȱmaterialȱcartridgesȱ andȱtheȱwasteȱcontainerȱinȱtheȱprinter.ȱItȱisȱimportantȱthatȱyouȱperiodicallyȱ checkȱthatȱtheȱweightȱmeasurementsȱareȱaccurate,ȱbothȱforȱconvenienceȱandȱ toȱpreventȱunnecessaryȱwasteȱofȱprintingȱmaterials.ȱItȱisȱrecommendedȱthatȱ youȱcalibrateȱtheȱloadȱcellsȱonceȱaȱmonth. To calibrate load cells: 1. StartȱtheȱLoadȱCellȱCalibrationȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenuȱ(seeȱ figure 6Ȭ8ȱonȱpage 11).ȱ 2. Inȱtheȱfollowingȱscreen,ȱselectȱoneȱorȱmoreȱloadȱcellsȱthatȱyouȱwantȱtoȱ calibrate.ȱ Figure 6-95: Load cell selection 3. Removeȱeachȱselectedȱcartridgeȱfromȱtheȱmaterialsȱcart,ȱandȱclickȱNext. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–59 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 4. Inȱtheȱnextȱwizardȱscreen,ȱobserveȱtheȱnumbersȱandȱwaitȱuntilȱtheȱlevelȱ isȱrelativelyȱstable—twoȱunitsȱaboveȱorȱbelowȱtheȱaverageȱlevelȱshown. Figure 6-96: Level stabilization 5. Selectȱtheȱcheckȱbox,ȱandȱclickȱNext. 6. ClickȱDoneȱinȱtheȱfinalȱwizardȱscreen. Figure 6-97: Final wizard screen 6–60 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Replacing the Odor Filter Ifȱtheȱprinterȱexhaustȱisȱnotȱconnectedȱtoȱanȱexternalȱventilationȱsystem,ȱaȱ builtȬinȱactivatedȬcarbonȱfilterȱremovesȱodorsȱfromȱprintingȱmaterials.ȱThisȱ filterȱshouldȱbeȱreplacedȱregularlyȱ(asȱnecessary)ȱtoȱkeepȱyourȱworkingȱ environmentȱpleasant.ȱThisȱisȱnormallyȱdoneȱduringȱtheȱpreventiveȬ maintenanceȱserviceȱvisit. Replacing the UV Lamps TheȱUVȱlampsȱusedȱforȱcuringȱmodelsȱhaveȱaȱlong,ȱbutȱlimited,ȱworkingȱ life.ȱTheȱStratasysȱserviceȱengineerȱtestsȱtheirȱeffectivenessȱduringȱregularȱ maintenanceȱchecks,ȱandȱreplacesȱthem,ȱifȱnecessary.ȱYouȱcanȱtestȱandȱ adjustȱtheirȱeffectiveȱpowerȱwithȱtheȱUVȱCalibrationȱwizardȱ(seeȱ“Testingȱ andȱCalibratingȱtheȱUVȱLamps”ȱonȱpage 53.ȱIfȱyouȱneedȱtoȱreplaceȱaȱUVȱ lamp,ȱfollowȱtheseȱinstructions:ȱ 1. Makeȱsureȱtheȱprinterȱisȱinȱofflineȱmode. Figure 6-98: Offline mode indicator (red) Theȱonline/offlineȱbuttonȱatȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱprinterȱinterfaceȱshouldȱbeȱ red.ȱIfȱnot,ȱclickȱitȱtoȱswitchȱtheȱprinterȱtoȱofflineȱmode. WARNING: Before continuing, make sure that the safety interlock is not defeated, and that the lamp is not hot. 2. StartȱtheȱUVȱLampȱReplacementȱwizardȱfromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenuȱ(seeȱ figure 6Ȭ8ȱonȱpage 11).ȱ 3. Makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱisȱempty,ȱandȱconfirmȱthisȱinȱtheȱwizardȱ screen.ȱThen,ȱcloseȱtheȱprinterȱcoverȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-99: “Empty tray” confirmation screen Theȱaxesȱmoveȱtoȱtheȱ“home”ȱposition. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–61 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 4. SelectȱtheȱUVȱlamp(s)ȱtoȱbeȱreplacedȱandȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-100: UV lamp selection screen 5. DisconnectȱtheȱUVȬlampȱpowerȱconnectorȱandȱtheȱUVȱheatȱfuseȱ connector. Figure 6-101: Disconnecting the UV lamp Note: Do not disconnect the power connection to the cooling fans. 6. LoosenȱtheȱscrewȱsecuringȱtheȱUVȱlampȱcoverȱ(A),ȱandȱpullȱtheȱcoverȱ upȱ(B),ȱthenȱoutȱ(C). Figure 6-102: Removing the UV lamp cover 6–62 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 7. Pullȱtheȱlampȱreflectorȱoutȱofȱtheȱprintȱblock. Figure 6-103: Removing the UV lamp reflector 8. Inspectȱtheȱnewȱlampȱreflector,ȱandȱmakeȱsureȱthatȱaȱblackȱstripȱisȱ attachedȱtoȱtheȱinsideȱofȱit.ȱIfȱnot,ȱinstallȱone—onȱtheȱsideȱofȱtheȱ reflectorȱoppositeȱ(notȱnextȱto)ȱtheȱprintȱblock. Note: Extra black strips are included in the printer Start-up Kit. If necessary, you can remove the black strip from the old reflector and install it in the new reflector (as long as the black paint has not faded). 9. Discardȱtheȱoldȱreflectorȱandȱlamp. Dispose of the used UV lamp in accordance with environmental and safety requirements. WARNING: Broken lamp hazard. UV lamps contain mercury. Deal with broken lamps with caution. ¾ Ventilate the room thoroughly. ¾ Use protective gloves when collecting mercury and lamp components. ¾ Remove spilled mercury with a method that prevents the generation of mercury vapor, such as a syringe, packing tape or paper. ¾ Place the broken lamp, mercury and contaminated materials in an airtight, non-metallic container. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–63 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer 10. InsertȱtheȱnewȱUVȱlamp/reflectorȱunitȱintoȱtheȱhousingȱnextȱtoȱtheȱprintȱ block. Figure 6-104: Print block and UV lamp assembly, showing correct placement of black strip 11. Replaceȱtheȱlampȱcoverȱbyȱinsertingȱitȱintoȱtheȱslotȱonȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱ housing,ȱandȱtightenȱtheȱsecuringȱscrewȱonȱtop. Figure 6-105: Replacing the lamp cover 12. Reconnectȱtheȱpowerȱandȱheatȱfuseȱconnectors. Figure 6-106: Connecting the UV lamp 6–64 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide 13. Inȱtheȱwizardȱscreen,ȱconfirmȱthatȱyouȱhaveȱreplacedȱtheȱlamp(s)ȱandȱ thatȱtheȱblackȱstripȱisȱattached,ȱthenȱclickȱNext. Figure 6-107: UV-installation confirmation screen Theȱwizardȱoperatesȱtheȱlampsȱandȱchecksȱifȱtheirȱpowerȱisȱwithinȱtheȱ acceptableȱrangeȱforȱeachȱprintingȱmode.ȱ(Theȱmodeȱcurrentlyȱbeingȱ checkedȱappearsȱinȱtheȱlowerȬleftȱcornerȱofȱtheȱprinterȱinterface.) Figure 6-108: Status screen during UV lamp check 14. AfterȱreplacingȱaȱUVȱlamp,ȱitȱisȱrecommendedȱthatȱyouȱcalibrateȱitsȱ powerȱforȱtheȱvariousȱprintingȱmodes.ȱTheȱnextȱscreenȱallowsȱyouȱtoȱ continueȱtoȱtheȱUVȱCalibrationȱwizardȱ(seeȱ“TestingȱandȱCalibratingȱ theȱUVȱLamps”ȱonȱpage 53). Figure 6-109: Final wizard screen DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–65 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Built-in Tests Theȱprinterȱapplicationȱcontainsȱaȱsuiteȱofȱtestsȱforȱregularlyȱcheckingȱtheȱ hardwareȱandȱsoftware,ȱandȱforȱtroubleshooting.ȱYouȱcanȱconfigureȱbasicȱ communicationsȱandȱenvironmentȱtestsȱtoȱrunȱautomatically,ȱwhenȱtheȱ Stratasysȱsoftwareȱopens.ȱInȱaddition,ȱyouȱcanȱrunȱaȱmoreȱcomprehensiveȱ setȱofȱtestsȱbeforeȱprocessingȱaȱprintȱjob,ȱasȱaȱsystemȱcheck,ȱtoȱensureȱ optimumȱprintingȱresults.ȱ Becauseȱrunningȱtheȱtestsȱeffectsȱtheȱoperationȱofȱtheȱprinter,ȱyouȱcanȱonlyȱ openȱtheȱBuiltȬinȱTestsȱinterfaceȱwhenȱtheȱsystemȱisȱnotȱprinting. Theȱtestȱsuiteȱfeatures: • TheȱorganizationȱofȱprintingȬrelatedȱtasksȱinȱcategories: Communicationsȱ Dataȱcardsȱ Temperaturesȱ Voltagesȱ Encoderȱrepeatabilityȱ PrintȬheadȱheating PrintȬheadȱfillingȱ • Aȱclearȱdisplayȱofȱtestȱresultsȱandȱtheȱsourceȱofȱanyȱfailures,ȱenablingȱ youȱtoȱdetermineȱifȱprintingȱisȱpossibleȱorȱworthwhile.ȱ • Theȱabilityȱtoȱmonitorȱtestȱresultsȱforȱspecificȱcomponents. • Troubleshootingȱtips. Runningȱtheseȱtestsȱcanȱhelpȱidentifyȱproblemsȱinȱtheȱprinterȱhardwareȱandȱ software.ȱAȱlargeȱnumberȱofȱhardwareȱdefectsȱ(orȱnearȬdefects)ȱwarnsȱyouȱ ofȱpossibleȱprintingȱproblems,ȱeitherȱforȱcurrentȱorȱfutureȱjobs. Stratasys recommends running the built-in tests in the following cases: ¾ as a routine test, once every two weeks ¾ as a system check, before major (long) jobs ¾ as needed, for troubleshooting Accessing Built-in Tests To open the Built-in Tests screen, do one of the following: • FromȱtheȱOptionsȱmenu,ȱselectȱBuilt-In Tests. • PressȱCtrl+Alt+B. Figure 6-110: Selecting Built-In Tests from the Options menu 6–66 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Test Interface TheȱBuiltȱInȱTestsȱscreenȱlistsȱpreȬconfiguredȱtests,ȱgroupedȱbyȱcomponentȱ categories.ȱInȱthisȱscreen,ȱyouȱselectȱandȱrunȱtests,ȱandȱtheȱresultsȱareȱ displayed. Figure 6-111: Built In Tests screen Test List TestȱName Thisȱcolumnȱlistsȱallȱofȱtheȱtests,ȱtogetherȱwithȱselectionȱcheckȱboxes.ȱ Clickȱtheȱcheckȱboxesȱtoȱselectȱtheȱtestsȱyouȱwantȱtoȱrun.ȱToȱremoveȱaȱ selection,ȱclickȱtheȱcheckȱboxȱagain.ȱToȱquicklyȱselectȱallȱofȱtheȱtestsȱinȱaȱ componentȱcategory,ȱuseȱtheȱGroupȱdropȬdownȱlistȱatȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱ screen. Group Thisȱcolumnȱshowsȱtheȱcomponentȱcategoriesȱforȱeachȱtest.ȱ ThisȱtellsȱyouȱwhichȱtestsȱareȱrunȱwhenȱselectingȱaȱcategoryȱfromȱtheȱGroupȱ dropȬdownȱlistȱatȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱscreen. Status Thisȱcolumnȱshowsȱtheȱresultsȱofȱeachȱtestȱafterȱyouȱrunȱit: Testȱsuccessfullyȱcompleted. Testȱfailed.ȱ Unknownȱresults.ȱ(Theȱtestȱhasȱnotȱbeenȱrunȱyet.) DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–67 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Test Selection Area Running Tests InȱtheȱTestȱSelectionȱarea,ȱatȱtheȱbottomȱofȱtheȱscreen,ȱyouȱcanȱquicklyȱselectȱ orȱdeȬselectȱtestsȱbyȱtheirȱcharacteristics: All Clickȱtoȱselectȱallȱofȱtheȱtestsȱinȱtheȱlist. None ClickȱtoȱdeȬselectȱallȱofȱtheȱtestsȱinȱtheȱlist. Unknown Clickȱtoȱselectȱallȱtestȱthatȱhaveȱnotȱbeenȱrunȱyetȱ(Status = ?). Group Useȱthisȱmenuȱtoȱselectȱtestsȱbyȱcomponentȱcategory. Selection Set UseȱthisȱmenuȱtoȱselectȱaȱpreȬconfiguredȱsetȱofȱtestsȱtoȱrunȱatȱ specifiedȱtimesȱ(computerȱstartup,ȱbeforeȱprinting,ȱetc.). To run the selected tests: ¾ Clickȱ After you run a test, the Save and View command buttons are added to the Built In Tests screen (see below). Test Results To save and view a report of all of the tests: ¾ UseȱtheȱSaveȱandȱViewȱcommandȱbuttonsȱ(seeȱbelow). 6–68 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Command Buttons Youȱclickȱtheȱcommandȱbuttons,ȱonȱtheȱrightȱsideȱofȱtheȱscreen,ȱtoȱperformȱ theȱfollowingȱoperations: Run Clickȱtoȱrunȱtheȱselectedȱtests. Reset Clickȱtoȱclearȱpreviouslyȱrunȱtests.ȱThisȱreturnsȱtheȱstatusȱofȱeachȱtestȱtoȱ Unknownȱ(?). Save Clickȱtoȱsaveȱaȱreportȱthatȱsummarizesȱtheȱtestsȱrun.ȱTheȱreportȱisȱsavedȱasȱ anȱHTMLȱfile.ȱYouȱcanȱsaveȱanyȱnumberȱofȱreportsȱforȱtheȱtestsȱyouȱrun;ȱtheȱ nameȱofȱtheȱfileȱsavedȱisȱBITReport [date][time].htm.ȱByȱdefault,ȱtheseȱfilesȱ areȱsavedȱinȱtheȱStratasysȱinstallationȱfolder,ȱbutȱyouȱcanȱsaveȱitȱinȱanyȱotherȱ folder. View Clickȱtoȱdisplayȱtheȱlatestȱtestȱreportȱthatȱyouȱsaved.ȱ(Youȱcanȱviewȱotherȱ testȱreportsȱbyȱopeningȱtheȱrelevantȱfilesȱinȱyourȱWebȱbrowser.ȱToȱdoȱso,ȱ openȱWindowsȱExplorer,ȱandȱdoubleȱclickȱtheȱBITReportȱfile.) Close ClickȱtoȱcloseȱtheȱBuiltȬinȱTestsȱscreen. Summary Onȱtheȱrightȱsideȱofȱtheȱscreen,ȱaȱsymbolȱrepresentsȱtheȱcombinedȱresultsȱofȱ allȱtheȱtestsȱrun,ȱusingȱtheȱsymbolsȱfromȱtheȱStatusȱcolumn. Allȱtestsȱsuccessfullyȱcompleted. Atȱleastȱoneȱtestȱfailed. Notȱallȱtestsȱperformed. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–69 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Test Descriptions and Troubleshooting TheȱfollowingȱtableȱlistsȱtheȱnameȱofȱeachȱtestȱinȱtheȱBuiltȬinȱTestsȱsuite,ȱ togetherȱwithȱitsȱdescriptionȱandȱaȱpossibleȱreasonȱforȱitsȱfailure.ȱIfȱyouȱ needȱassistance,ȱcontactȱyourȱStratasysȱserviceȱprovider. Test Name Description Possible Reason for Failure SubȬSystemȱ Communication TestsȱcommunicationsȱbetweenȱEdenȱ components. FIFOȱNonȬInterrupt/ FIFOȱInterrupt •TestsȱtheȱdataȱqueueȱinȱtheȱDATAȱPCIȱ •Disconnectedȱcommunicationsȱcable. •Faultyȱcable. •IfȱbothȱFIFOȱtestsȱfail:ȱ Encoder Faultyȱencoder. Testsȱtheȱencoderȇsȱreliabilityȱbyȱ comparingȱreadingsȱfromȱmultipleȱrunsȱ alongȱtheȱXȬaxis. SystemȱInfo Comparesȱtheȱfollowingȱparameterȱ valuesȱwithȱtheȱminimumȱ requirements. •physicalȱmemory •availableȱmemory •freeȱspaceȱonȱdisk •monitorȱresolution FailureȱofȱRAMȱmemoryȱallocationȱinȱtheȱ printerȱcomputer. RFID VerifiesȱtheȱpresenceȱofȱRFIDȱtagsȱonȱallȱ loadedȱmaterialȱcartridges,ȱandȱtestsȱ themȱbyȱwritingȱtoȱandȱreadingȱfromȱ eachȱone. •FaultyȱRFIDȱreader. •FaultyȱRFIDȱreaderȱpowerȱsupply. •FaultyȱorȱmisalignedȱRFIDȱtag. •Highȱlevelȱofȱelectromagneticȱnoiseȱ SystemȱVoltages Checksȱifȱtheȱfollowingȱvoltagesȱareȱ withinȱ5%ȱofȱtheȱrequiredȱvoltage: •40VȱtoȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱbyȱtheȱVPPȱ powerȱsupply •12Vȱtoȱtheȱheightȱthermistorsȱbyȱtheȱ VDDȱpowerȱsupply •VPPȱpowerȱsupply:ȱ card. •TestsȱtheȱWindowsȱinterrupt. FaultyȱDATA_PCIȱcard. •IfȱonlyȱtheȱFIFOȱInterruptȱtestȱfails: FaultyȱWindowsȱinterrupt. aroundȱtheȱRFIDȱtag. Faultyȱheadȱdrive(s). •VDDȱpowerȱsupply:ȱ Faultyȱheightȱthermistor(s). BlockȱFilling Analyzesȱtheȱthermistorȱreadingsȱwhenȱ Faultyȱthermistor. theȱblockȱisȱfullȱandȱwhenȱitȱisȱempty. Interlock Testsȱtheȱinterlockȱinȱtheȱprinterȱcover. •Failureȱofȱinterlockȱmechanism. •Faultyȱlatch.ȱ •Disconnectedȱcable. CabinȱTemperature Testsȱtheȱtemperatureȱlevelȱinȱtheȱ buildȬtrayȱarea. Faultyȱtemperatureȱsensorȱ(OHDB). HeadȱEEPROM Testsȱtheȱread/writeȱcapabilitiesȱofȱtheȱ printȬheadȱdriverȱcards. FaultyȱprintȬheadȱdriverȱcard(s). HeadȱVoltage Checksȱtheȱcontrolȱofȱvoltagesȱsuppliedȱ FaultyȱprintȬheadȱdriverȱcard(s). toȱtheȱprintȱheads. Head/BlockȱHeaters Testsȱtheȱheatersȱinȱtheȱprintȱheadsȱandȱ Faultyȱheatersȱorȱthermistors. inȱtheȱprintȬblockȱbody. UVȱLamps TestsȱeachȱUVȱlampȱatȱtheȱHighȱQualityȱ FaultyȱUVȱlamp. powerȱlevel. FaultyȱUVȱpowerȱsupply. DisconnectedȱUVȱcable. AxesȱLimit Testsȱtheȱhardwareȱandȱsoftwareȱlimitsȱ Faultyȱhardwareȱsensors.ȱ ofȱallȱaxes. WrongȱMaxȱPositionȱparameter. Oneȱorȱmoreȱofȱtheȱprinterȱparametersȱisȱ ParameterȱSanityȱCheck Comparesȱtheȱvaluesȱofȱallȱprinterȱ parametersȱ(inȱcfgȱfiles)ȱtoȱtheȱrequiredȱ notȱwithinȱtheȱrequiredȱrange.ȱ DetailsȱappearȱinȱtheȱBITȱreport. values. Vacuum 6–70 Testsȱtheȱvacuumȱlevelȱinȱtheȱprintȱ block. •Faultyȱvacuumȱsensor.ȱ •Vacuumȱleakage.ȱ •Wrongȱparameters. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Replacing the Waste Container Printerȱwasteȱcontainsȱpartiallyȱcuredȱpolymericȱmaterial,ȱcollectedȱduringȱ normalȱoperationȱandȱmaintenanceȱofȱtheȱprinter.ȱForȱsafetyȱandȱ environmentalȱreasons,ȱthisȱmaterialȱisȱkeptȱinȱaȱspecialȱleakȬproof,ȱ disposableȱcontainer. Theȱcontainerȱhasȱaȱcapacityȱofȱ10ȱkilogramsȱofȱwasteȱmaterial—usuallyȱ enoughȱforȱseveralȱmonthsȱofȱprinterȱuse.ȱTheȱprinterȱapplicationȱdisplaysȱ aȱwarningȱmessageȱwhenȱthereȱareȱ9ȱkilogramsȱofȱmaterialȱinȱtheȱcontainer,ȱ andȱstopsȱtheȱprintingȱwhenȱtheȱnetȱweightȱreachesȱ9.5ȱkilograms.ȱAboveȱ9ȱ kilograms,ȱtheȱsoftwareȱdoesȱnotȱallowȱyouȱtoȱstartȱaȱprintȱjobȱ(orȱaȱprintingȱ activity)ȱuntilȱyouȱreplaceȱtheȱwasteȱcontainer.ȱYouȱcanȱmonitorȱtheȱweightȱ ofȱtheȱwasteȱcontainerȱinȱtheȱMaintenanceȱscreenȱofȱtheȱprinterȱinterface.ȱYouȱ canȱalsoȱvisuallyȱinspectȱtheȱlevelȱofȱwasteȱinȱtheȱcontainer.ȱ(Toȱaccessȱit,ȱseeȱ page 73.) To monitor the waste weight (and other indicators) in the printer: ¾ Inȱtheȱmainȱprinterȱinterfaceȱscreen,ȱclickȱtheȱdisplayȱtoggleȱtoȱviewȱtheȱ printerȱindicators. Waste weight Display toggle button DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–71 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer Waste weight Display toggle button Figure 6-112: Printer interface, showing waste weight (red background indicates operator alert) Theȱwasteȱcontainerȱconsistsȱofȱaȱplasticȱcontainerȱinsideȱaȱcardboardȱbox.ȱ Youȱtypicallyȱdisposeȱofȱtheȱentireȱwasteȱcontainer—includingȱtheȱbox.ȱ Therefore,ȱyouȱmustȱassembleȱaȱnewȱboxȱandȱinsertȱaȱnewȱplasticȱcontainerȱ beforeȱyouȱcanȱinstallȱitȱinȱtheȱprinter. Replacement boxes, plastic containers, and sealing caps are supplied in the Stratasys printer start-up kit and in the preventive-maintenance kit. To prepare a new waste container: 1. Assembleȱtheȱcardboardȱbox,ȱmakingȱsureȱtoȱpunchȱoutȱtheȱperforatedȱ sections. 2. Placeȱaȱnewȱplasticȱcontainerȱintoȱtheȱbox. Note: Do not close the box until you connect the waste drain tube from the printer. 6–72 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide To replace the waste container: 1. LocateȱtheȱdoorȱonȱtheȱlowerȬleftȱsideȱofȱtheȱprinter. 2. PushȱinȱtheȱtopȬcenterȱofȱtheȱdoorȱtoȱreleaseȱtheȱlatchȱandȱopenȱtheȱ door. Figure 6-113: Accessing the waste container 3. Carefullyȱslideȱoutȱtheȱwasteȱcontainerȱtoȱremoveȱitȱfromȱtheȱprinter. 4. Closeȱtheȱfullȱcontainerȱwithȱtheȱcapȱsuppliedȱwithȱtheȱnewȱwasteȱ container. 5. CloseȱtheȱnewȱwasteȬcontainerȱbox,ȱusingȱtapeȱtoȱholdȱitȱclosed.ȱ • Theȱcontainerȱshouldȱbeȱonȱtheȱextremeȱrightȱsideȱofȱtheȱ compartment.ȱ • Makeȱsureȱthatȱtheȱwasteȱdrainȱtubeȱisȱnotȱcrimpedȱandȱthatȱitȱisȱnotȱ pinchedȱbyȱtheȱcontainer. 6. Closeȱtheȱwasteȱcompartmentȱdoor. Dispose of the full waste container in accordance with environmental and safety requirements. TheȱpaintedȱexteriorȱplasticȱpanelsȱofȱStratasysȱ3Dȱprintersȱhaveȱaȱdurableȱ Cleaning the Exterior Panels finish,ȱofferingȱexcellentȱchemicalȱresistanceȱtoȱcommonȱcleaningȱmaterials.ȱ Followȱtheȱrecommendationsȱbelowȱwhenȱcleaningȱtheseȱareasȱofȱtheȱ printer. AcceptableȱCleaningȱAgents • mildȱsoapȱsolutionȱ • commonȱhouseholdȱcleanersȱandȱwindowȱcleaners • commonȱcommercialȱandȱindustrialȱdetergents,ȱ5%ȱsolutionȱinȱwaterȱ • alcoholȱ(ethanol,ȱisopropanol),ȱ10%ȱtoȱ40%ȱsolutionȱinȱwater Wipeȱtheȱexteriorȱofȱtheȱprinter,ȱusingȱaȱsoftȱclothȱmoistenedȱwithȱtheȱ cleaningȱsolution. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 6–73 Operating & Maintaining the Stratasys P750K 3D Printer UnacceptableȱMaterials • industrialȱsolventsȱ • cleaningȱagentsȱcontainingȱhydrocarbons,ȱketones,ȱestersȱandȱlacquerȱ thinners • sprayȱdisinfectants • abrasivesȱandȱagentsȱwhichȱcouldȱwearȱawayȱtheȱpanelȱfinish 6–74 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Handling Printed Models RemovingȱModelsȱAfterȱPrinting.............................................................. 2 RemovingȱtheȱSupportȱMaterial................................................................ 2 PostȬPrintingȱTreatmentȱforȱModelsȱPrintedȱwithȱObjetȱVeroClear..... 4 StoringȱModels............................................................................................. 5 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 7–1 Handling Printed Models Removing Models After Printing Afterȱprintingȱmodels,ȱyouȱshouldȱallowȱthemȱtoȱcoolȱasȱmuchȱasȱpossibleȱ beforeȱhandlingȱthem.ȱIfȱadditionalȱmodelsȱdoȱnotȱhaveȱtoȱbeȱproducedȱonȱ theȱprinter,ȱitȱisȱbestȱtoȱletȱtheȱprintedȱmodelsȱcoolȱinȱtheȱprinter,ȱwithȱtheȱ coverȱclosed,ȱasȱlongȱasȱpossible.ȱ If the printer must be used to produce additional models as soon as possible: 1. Letȱtheȱprintedȱmodelsȱcoolȱonȱtheȱbuildȱtrayȱforȱatȱleastȱ10ȱminutes.ȱ 2. Veryȱcarefully,ȱremoveȱtheȱmodelsȱfromȱtheȱtrayȱwithȱaȱscraperȱorȱ spatulaȱ(suppliedȱinȱtheȱtoolȱkit),ȱtakingȱcareȱnotȱtoȱpryȱorȱbendȱtheȱ model. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling printed models before they are washed. 3. Placeȱtheȱmodelsȱonȱaȱflatȱsurface,ȱandȱcoverȱthemȱwithȱaȱcardboardȱ boxȱorȱpaperȱhood. Thisȱallowsȱtheȱmodelsȱtoȱcoolȱslowlyȱandȱevenly. 4. Letȱtheȱmodelsȱcoolȱforȱseveralȱhours. Removing the Support Material Afterȱprintedȱmodelsȱhaveȱcooled,ȱtheȱsupportȱmaterialȱmustȱbeȱremoved.ȱ Thisȱcanȱbeȱdoneȱbyȱdifferentȱmethods,ȱdependingȱonȱtheȱsizeȱofȱtheȱmodel,ȱ howȱdelicateȱitȱis,ȱtheȱamountȱandȱlocationȱofȱtheȱsupportȱmaterial,ȱandȱ otherȱfactors.ȱUseȱtheȱfollowingȱmethodsȱasȱaȱguide,ȱandȱadaptȱthemȱ(orȱaȱ combinationȱofȱthem)ȱforȱfinishingȱtheȱmodelsȱyouȱareȱhandling. Removing Excess Support Material by Hand Whileȱwearingȱprotectiveȱgloves,ȱbreakȱawayȱexcessȱsupportȱmaterialȱonȱ theȱoutsideȱofȱtheȱmodel.ȱForȱdelicateȱmodels,ȱuseȱaȱtoothpick,ȱpinȱorȱsmallȱ brushȱafterȱdippingȱtheȱmodelȱinȱwater. Removing Support Material with Water Pressure Forȱmostȱmodels,ȱtheȱmostȱefficientȱwayȱtoȱremoveȱsupportȱmaterialȱisȱbyȱ usingȱaȱhighȬpressureȱwaterȱjet.ȱOneȱsuitableȱsystemȱisȱtheȱBalcoȱWaterJetȱ cleaningȱunit.ȱThisȱdeviceȱisȱmarketedȱbyȱStratasys. 7–2 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Figure 7-1: Balco WaterJet Cleaning Unit Toȱcleanȱaȱmodelȱusingȱthisȱdevice,ȱyouȱplaceȱitȱinȱtheȱchamber,ȱandȱyouȱ manipulateȱitȱandȱtheȱjetȱusingȱtheȱbuiltȬin,ȱwaterproofȱsleeves.ȱAȱpumpȱ turnsȱordinaryȱtapȱwaterȱintoȱaȱhighȬpressureȱjet,ȱandȱaȱwiperȱkeepsȱtheȱ windowȱclear. Use caution when cleaning delicate models with high-pressure water systems. Removing Support Material with Caustic Soda Soakȱmodelsȱinȱaȱ1Ȭpercentȱsolutionȱofȱcausticȱsodaȱ(sodiumȱhydroxide)ȱtoȱ removeȱsupportȱmaterialȱfromȱdifficultȬtoȬreachȱareasȱandȱtoȱgiveȱtheȱ modelȱaȱsmooth,ȱcleanȱfinish.ȱTheȱamountȱofȱtimeȱyouȱsoakȱtheȱmodelȱinȱtheȱ solutionȱdependsȱonȱhowȱdelicateȱitȱisȱandȱhowȱmuchȱsupportȱmaterialȱ needsȱtoȱbeȱremoved,ȱbutȱitȱisȱtypicallyȱbetweenȱhalfȬanȬhourȱandȱseveralȱ hours.ȱInȱanyȱcase,ȱyouȱshouldȱremoveȱasȱmuchȱsupportȱmaterialȱasȱ possibleȱbeforeȱtheȱcausticȱsodaȱtreatment,ȱandȱrinseȱtheȱmodelȱthoroughlyȱ (withȱaȱwaterȱjet)ȱafterwards.ȱ WARNING: Caustic soda may cause chemical burns, scarring and blindness. Mixing it with water generates heat that could ignite other materials. Never pour water into a caustic soda solution. When diluting the solution, always add caustic soda to water. Take adequate safety precautions; always use nitrile gloves when handling caustic soda and models soaked in it. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 7–3 Handling Printed Models Post-Printing Treatment for Models Printed with Objet VeroClear ModelsȱmadeȱwithȱObjetȱVeroClearȱ(RGD810)ȱhaveȱaȱslightȱyellowȱtintȱ whenȱremovedȱfromȱtheȱprinter.ȱThisȱisȱespeciallyȱtrueȱforȱmodelsȱprintedȱ withȱaȱglossyȱfinish.ȱTheȱyellowȱtintȱfadesȱnaturallyȱoverȱtime,ȱbutȱyouȱcanȱ greatlyȱaccelerateȱthisȱprocessȱbyȱusingȱaȱsuitableȱphotobleachingȱ treatment. Asȱaȱrule,ȱbestȱclarityȱisȱachievedȱwhenȱpartsȱareȱprintedȱwithȱaȱmatteȱ finish,ȱandȱtreatedȱasȱexplainedȱbelow. Photobleachingȱmodelsȱinvolvesȱexposingȱthemȱtoȱlight.ȱToȱachieveȱhighlyȱ controlledȱandȱpredictableȱresults,ȱaȱprofessionalȱilluminationȱchamberȱisȱ recommended.ȱHowever,ȱadequateȱresultsȱmayȱbeȱobtainedȱusingȱordinaryȱ deskȱlampsȱfittedȱwithȱsuitableȱfluorescentȱelements. Figure 7-2: Illumination chamber PhotoBleaching I nstructions Figure 7-3: Desk lamps Followȱtheseȱinstructionsȱforȱphotobleachingȱprintedȱmodels. • Theȱfluorescentȱlampsȱshouldȱbeȱratedȱ45W,ȱ6500K. • Whenȱusingȱdeskȱlamps,ȱplaceȱtheȱmodelsȱinȱaȱcontainerȱlinedȱwithȱ aluminumȱfoil.ȱUseȱatȱleastȱtwoȱlamps,ȱmoreȱwhenȱtreatingȱmodelsȱinȱaȱ largeȱcontainer. • Arrangeȱtheȱmodelsȱwithȱenoughȱspaceȱbetweenȱthemȱtoȱallowȱlightȱtoȱ reachȱallȱsidesȱofȱeachȱmodel. • Verifyȱthatȱtheȱambientȱtemperatureȱaroundȱtheȱmodelsȱisȱ approximatelyȱ40 ºCȱ(104 ºF).ȱHigherȱtemperaturesȱmayȱcauseȱmodelȱ distortion;ȱlowerȱtemperaturesȱmayȱnotȱproduceȱsatisfactoryȱresults.ȱ Whenȱusingȱdeskȱlamps,ȱyouȱcanȱachieveȱtheȱrequiredȱtemperatureȱbyȱ positioningȱtheȱlampsȱapproximatelyȱ10ȱcmȱ(4ȱin.)ȱaboveȱtheȱmodels. • Inspectȱtheȱmodelsȱafterȱsixȱhoursȱofȱtreatment.ȱ Forȱpartsȱwithȱaȱmatteȱfinish,ȱthisȱshouldȱbeȱenough.ȱPolishȱandȱ lacquerȱtheȱparts. Forȱpartsȱwithȱaȱglossyȱfinish,ȱcontinueȱtheȱphotobleachingȱ treatmentȱforȱupȱtoȱ18ȱhoursȱmore. InȱStratasysȱlaboratories,ȱthereȱwasȱaȱtintȱreductionȱofȱapproximatelyȱ 70%ȱwithinȱsixȱhours.ȱAfterȱ24ȱhours,ȱtintȱwasȱreducedȱbyȱ approximatelyȱ90%. More information about this treatment is available in the application note VeroClear RGD810 Model Material. 7–4 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) Stratasys P750K User Guide Storing Models Modelsȱareȱcuredȱasȱtheyȱareȱprinted,ȱmakingȱthemȱsafeȱandȱstableȱforȱaȱ longȱtime.ȱHowever,ȱproperȱstorageȱconditionsȱareȱnecessaryȱtoȱpreventȱ deforming. • KeepȱprintedȱmodelsȱatȱroomȱtemperatureȱandȱinȱaȱlowȬhumidityȱ environment. • Doȱnotȱexposeȱmodelsȱtoȱdirectȱsunlightȱandȱotherȱheatȱsources. DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1) 7–5 Handling Printed Models 7–6 DOC08010 Rev. A (DRAFT 1)
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Print high-res Author : MR Create Date : 2015:06:16 18:26:53+03:00 Modify Date : 2015:06:16 18:26:53+03:00 Subject : DOC-08010 Rev. A (Draft1) XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.2 Metadata Date : 2015:06:16 15:39:25+03:00 Format : application/pdf Title : Stratasys P750k User Guide Creator : MR Description : DOC-08010 Rev. A (Draft1) Document ID : uuid:7900200d-9b05-497f-acfe-5ff0bbfbd6ab Instance ID : uuid:b7379cda-45b9-4dd6-9f3d-bae678778b6a Page Count : 196EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools